Home
/
Mitsubishi Electric
/
FR-F820-00046
/
Instruction Manual

Mitsubishi Electric FR-F820-00046, Instruction Manual

Share

Page: 33 / 940

Mitsubishi Electric FR-F820-00046 Instruction Manual Download Page 33

Installation and wiring

Peripheral devices

FR-F800

2 - 5

NOTES

When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic
contactor according to the inverter model, and select cables and reactors according to the motor
output.

When the breaker on the inverter's input side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), dam-
age to internal parts of the inverter etc. The cause of the trip must be identified and removed
before turning ON the power of the breaker.

«
...
31
32
33
34
35
...
»

Summary of Contents for FR-F820-00046

Page 1: ...UBISHI ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FR F800 Inverter Instruction Manual FR F820 00046 0 75K to 04750 110K E FR F840 00023 0 75K to 06830 315K E FR F842 07700 355K to 12120 560K E Art no 292550 01 06 2017 Version C Version check ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ... values 앫 Pr 111 Pr 1361 to Pr 1381 PID control enhanced functions 앫 Pr 1018 Monitor with sign selection 앫 MM EFS 3000 r min specification 앫 Speed detection signal FB FB2 C 06 2017 akl pdp rw Additions Changes 앫 FR F800 E Ethernet communication function built in type 앫 All connection diagrams appear with the control logic of the input terminal as source logic ...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...el who meets all the conditions below A person who took a proper engineering training Such training may be available at your local Mitsubishi Electric office Contact your local sales office for schedules and locations A personwho can accessoperating manuals fortheprotectivedevices e g light curtain connect ed to the safety control system A person who has read and familiarized himself herself with ...

Page 6: ...rwise you may get an electric shock or be injured If your application requires by installation standards an RCD residual current device as up stream protection please select according to DIN VDE 0100 530 as following Single phase inverter type A or B Three phase inverter only type B Perform setting dial and key operations with dry hands to prevent an electric shock Other wise you may get an electr...

Page 7: ...can far exceed 100 C for brief periods Make sure that there is adequate protection against accidental contact and a safe distance is maintained to other units and system parts Be sure to perform daily and periodic inspections as specified in the Instruction Manual If a product is used without any inspection a burst breakage or a fire may occur E CAUTION Apply only the voltage specified in the inst...

Page 8: ... can result in breakdowns Prevent other conductive bodies such as screws and metal fragments or other flammable substance such as oil from entering the inverter As the inverter is a precision instrument do not drop or subject it to impact If halogen based materials fluorine chlorine bromine iodine etc infiltrate into a Mitsub ishi Electric product the product will be damaged Halogen based material...

Page 9: ...ch separately to make an emergency stop power off mechanical brake operation for emergency stop etc Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the inverter alarm A failure to do so may restart the motor suddenly Do not use a PM motor for an application where the PM motor is driven by its load and runs at a speed higher than the maximum motor speed The inverter can be started and stopp...

Page 10: ... inverter is not designed to continuously hold a load Use an electro mechanical holding brake on the motor for this purpose Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period always perform inspec tion and test operation For prevention of damage due to static electricity touch nearby metal before touching this product to eliminate static electricity from your body Only one PM motor...

Page 11: ... confirm and adjust the parameters A failure to do so may cause some machines to make unexpected motions E CAUTION Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips check for the wiring fault short circuit damage to internal parts of the inverter etc Ide...

Page 12: ...ng instructions Handling instructions are steps that must be carried out in their exact sequence during startup op eration maintenance and similar operations They are numbered consecutively black numbers in white circles Text Text Text Use of footnotes in tables Instructionsintablesareexplainedinfootnotesunderneaththetables insuperscript Thereisafoot note character at the appropriate position in t...

Page 13: ...installation 2 21 2 3 4 Panel through attachment procedure 2 23 2 4 Terminal connection diagrams 2 25 2 4 1 CA type 2 25 2 4 2 FM type 2 27 2 4 3 CA type FR F800 E 2 29 2 4 4 FM type FR F800 E 2 31 2 5 Main circuit terminals 2 33 2 5 1 Details on the main circuit terminals 2 33 2 5 2 Terminal layout of the main circuit terminals wiring of power supply and the motor 2 34 2 5 3 Applicable cables and...

Page 14: ...I and leakage currents 3 1 3 1 1 Leakage currents and countermeasures 3 1 3 1 2 Countermeasures against inverter generated EMI 3 6 3 1 3 Built in EMC filter 3 9 3 2 Power supply harmonics 3 11 3 2 1 Power supply harmonics 3 11 3 2 2 Harmonic suppression guidelines 3 12 3 3 Installation of a reactor 3 16 3 4 Power OFF and magnetic contactor MC 3 17 3 5 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 4...

Page 15: ... 30 4 7 2 JOG operation from the operation panel 4 31 5 Parameters 5 1 Parameter List 5 2 5 1 1 Parameter list by number 5 2 5 1 2 Group parameter display 5 26 5 1 3 Parameter list by function group 5 28 5 2 Control method 5 39 5 2 1 Changing the control method 5 41 5 2 2 Selecting the Advanced magnetic flux vector control 5 45 5 2 3 Selecting the PM motor control 5 48 5 3 Speed control under PM m...

Page 16: ...otection electronic thermal O L relay 5 150 5 7 2 Cooling fan operation selection 5 160 5 7 3 Earth ground fault detection at start 5 161 5 7 4 Varying the activation level of the undervoltage protective function 5 161 5 7 5 Initiating a protective function 5 162 5 7 6 I O phase loss protection selection 5 163 5 7 7 Retry function 5 164 5 7 8 Emergency drive Fire mode 5 167 5 7 9 Limiting the outp...

Page 17: ...ion 5 348 5 11 5 PID control 5 353 5 11 6 PID gain tuning 5 373 5 11 7 Changing the display increment of numerical values used in PID control 5 381 5 11 8 PID pre charge function 5 385 5 11 9 Multi pump function Advanced PID function 5 392 5 11 10 PID control enhanced functions 5 404 5 11 11 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure flying start with an induction motor 5 415 5 11 12 Auto...

Page 18: ...agnetic excitation deceleration 5 564 5 13 13 Slip compensation 5 566 5 13 14 Speed smoothing control 5 567 5 14 Parameter clear all parameter clear 5 568 5 15 Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel 5 570 5 15 1 Parameter copy 5 571 5 15 2 Parameter verification 5 572 5 16 Copying and verifying parameters using USB memory 5 573 5 17 Checking parameters changed from their initial v...

Page 19: ...you have a trouble 6 33 6 6 1 Motor does not start 6 33 6 6 2 Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise 6 36 6 6 3 Inverter generates abnormal noise 6 37 6 6 4 Motor generates heat abnormally 6 37 6 6 5 Motor rotates in the opposite direction 6 37 6 6 6 Speed greatly differs from the setting 6 38 6 6 7 Acceleration deceleration is not smooth 6 38 6 6 8 Speed varies during operation 6 39 6...

Page 20: ...class 8 2 8 2 Motor rating 8 4 8 2 1 Premium high efficiency IPM motor MM EFS 1500 r min specification 8 4 8 2 2 Premium high efficiency IPM motor MM EFS 3000 r min specification 8 6 8 2 3 Premium high efficiency IPM motor MM THE4 1500 r min specification 8 8 8 3 Common specifications 8 10 8 4 Outline dimension drawings 8 12 8 4 1 Inverter outline dimension drawings 8 12 8 4 2 Dedicated motor outl...

Page 21: ... function PU operation Operation using the PU operation panel parameter unit External operation Operation using the control circuit signals Combined operation Combined operation using the PU operation panel parameter unit and External operation SF JR Mitsubishi standard motor SF HRCA Mitsubishi constant torque motor MM EFS MM THE4 Mitsubishi IPM motor MM EFS 1500 r min specification MM EFS motor w...

Page 22: ...oning Engineers Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners Notes on descriptions in this Instruction Manual Connection diagrams in this Instruction Manual appear with the control logic of the input terminal as source logic unless otherwise specified For the control logic refer to page 2 50 Harmonic Suppression Guidelines All the m...

Page 23: ...lse train output Terminal AM analog voltage output 0 to 10 V DC OFF Sink logic 60 Hz 9999 same as the power supply voltage 1 LD rating CA terminal CA equipped model Terminal CA analog current output 0 to 20 mA DC Terminal AM analog voltage output 0 to 10 V DC ON Source logic 50 Hz 8888 95 ofthe power supply voltage 0 SLD rating Tab 1 1 Differences between the types F R F 8 2 0 00046 1 Symbol Volta...

Page 24: ... C The inverter model name used in this Instruction Manual consists of the inverter model and the applicable motor capacity in brackets specified in kW e g FR F820 00046 0 75K This approach helps for better understanding and for choosing the right motor For further specification details like capacity current or overload current rating refer to page 8 1 For selecting the right frequency inverter yo...

Page 25: ...Introduction Component names FR F800 1 5 1 3 Component names Component names are shown below I002341E_B Fig 1 2 Appearance and structure ...

Page 26: ...nd current for the terminal 2 and 4 inputs 5 255 Control circuit terminal block Connects cables for the control circuit 2 46 EMC filter ON OFF connector Turns ON OFF the EMC filter 3 9 Main circuit terminal block Connects cables for the main circuit 2 33 Charge lamp Stays ON while the power is supplied to the main circuit 2 34 Wiring cover This cover is removable without unplugging cables FR F820 ...

Page 27: ... How to give a frequency command Set from the PU PU External External Change frequency with ON OFF switches connected to terminals multi speed setting Perform frequency setting by a current output device Connection across terminals 4 and 5 Perform frequency setting by a voltage output device Connection across terminals 2 and 5 Set from the PU PU External External External Change of frequency with ...

Page 28: ...to terminal 4 gives a frequency command External PU combined operation mode 2 4 20 Inputs to terminal STF and STR give a start command and the PU gives a frequency command External PU combined operation mode 1 4 22 Inputs to terminal STF and STR give a start command and inputs to terminal RH RM and RL give a frequency command External operation mode 4 24 Inputs to terminal STF and STR give a start...

Page 29: ...devices I003002E_B Fig 2 1 System configuration overview R L1 S L2 T L3 P1 P N P P P PR PR U V W U V W Personal computer FR Configurator2 USB IM connection PM connection Earth Ground Earth Ground Earth Ground USB device Mini B connector Install these options as required USB host A connector Communication status indicator LED USB host ...

Page 30: ...nstalled in an enclosure Incorrect wiring may lead to damage of the inverter The control signal lines must be kept fully away from the main circuit lines to protect them from noise The built in EMC filter can reduce the noise 2 17 2 25 3 9 Three phase AC power supply Must be within the permissible power supply specifications of the inverter 8 1 Molded case circuit breaker MCCB earth leakage circui...

Page 31: ...omputer A USB memory device enables parameter copies and the trace function 2 68 Noise filter ferrite core FR BSF01 FR BLF Install this to reduce the electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter The noise filter is effective in the range from about 0 5 MHz to 5 MHz A wire should be wound four turns at maximum 3 6 Induction motor Connect a squirrel cage induction motor Contactor Example No fus...

Page 32: ...ss rated current When using an MC on the inverter output side for commercial power supply operation switching using a general purpose motor select an MC regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038 AC 3 class rated current Motor output kW Applicable inverter model Moldedcasecircuitbreaker MCCB or Earth leakage circuit breaker ELB NF NV type Input side magnetic contactor Power factor improving AC o...

Page 33: ...agnetic contactor according to the inverter model and select cables and reactors according to the motor output When the breaker on the inverter s input side trips check for the wiring fault short circuit dam age to internal parts of the inverter etc The cause of the trip must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the breaker ...

Page 34: ...l Moldedcasecircuitbreaker MCCB or earth leakage circuit breaker ELB NF NV type Input side magnetic contactor Power factor improving AC or DC reactor Power factor improving AC or DC reactor Without With Without With 0 75 FR F840 00023 0 75K 5A 5A S T10 S T10 1 5 FR F840 00038 1 5K 10A 10A S T10 S T10 2 2 FR F840 00052 2 2K 10A 10A S T10 S T10 3 7 FR F840 00083 3 7K 20A 15A S T10 S T10 5 5 FR F840 ...

Page 35: ...agnetic contactor according to the inverter model and select cables and reactors according to the motor output When the breaker on the inverter s input side trips check for the wiring fault short circuit dam age to internal parts of the inverter etc The cause of the trip must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the breaker ...

Page 36: ... purpose motor select an MC regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038 AC 3 class rated current Motor output kW Applicable inverter model Moldedcasecircuitbreaker MCCB or Earth leakage circuit breaker ELB NF NV type Input side magnetic contactor Power factor improving AC or DC reactor Power factor improving AC or DC reactor Without With Without With 0 75 FR F820 00046 0 75K 10A 10A S T10 S T10 1...

Page 37: ...agnetic contactor according to the inverter model and select cables and reactors according to the motor output When the breaker on the inverter s input side trips check for the wiring fault short circuit dam age to internal parts of the inverter etc The cause of the trip must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the breaker ...

Page 38: ...40 00052 2 2K 10A 10A S T10 S T10 3 7 FR F840 00083 3 7K 20A 15A S T10 S T10 5 5 FR F840 00126 5 5K 30A 20A S T21 S T12 7 5 FR F840 00170 7 5K 30A 30A S T21 S T21 11 FR F840 00250 11K 50A 40A S T21 S T21 15 FR F840 00310 15K 60A 50A S N35 S T21 18 5 FR F840 00380 18 5K 75A 60A S N35 S N35 22 FR F840 00470 22K 100A 75A S N35 S N35 30 FR F840 00620 30K 125A 100A S N50 S N50 37 FR F840 00770 37K 150A...

Page 39: ...hen using an MC on the inverter output side for commercial power supply operation switching using a general purpose motor select an MC regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038 AC 3 class rated current NOTES When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the inverter model and select cables and reactors according to the motor ou...

Page 40: ...e operation panel These screws cannot be removed Press the upper edge of the operation panel while pulling out the operation panel To reinstall the operation panel align its connector on the back with the PU connector of the inverter and insert the operation panel After confirming that the operation panel is fit securely tighten the screws Tightening torque 0 40 to 0 45 Nm I002344E I002345E Fig 2 ...

Page 41: ...minals can be performed Removal of the front cover upper side FR F820 01540 37K or lower FR F840 00770 37K or lower Withthe frontcover lowerside removed loosen themountingscrew s onthe front cover upper side The screw s cannot be removed FR F820 00340 7 5K to FR F820 01540 37K and FR F840 00170 7 5K to FR F840 00770 37K have two mounting screws Holding the areas around the installation hooks on th...

Page 42: ...into place Tighten the mounting screw s at the lower part of the front cover upper side FR F820 00340 7 5K to FR F820 01540 37K and FR F840 00170 7 5K to FR F840 00770 37K have two mounting screws Install the front cover lower side by inserting the upper hook into the socket of the front cover upper side Tighten the mounting screws at the lower part of the front cover lower side I002348E Fig 2 9 R...

Page 43: ...nt cover upper side FR F820 01870 45K or higher FR F840 00930 45K or higher With the front cover lower side removed loosen the mounting screws on the front cover upper side These screws cannot be removed Holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sides of the front cover upper side pull out the cover using its upper side as a support With the front cover upper side removed wiring of th...

Page 44: ...s of the inverter Securely install the front cover upper side to the inverter by fixing the hooks on the sides of the cover into place Tighten the mounting screw s at the lower part of the front cover upper side Fasten the front cover lower side with the mounting screws I002351E Fig 2 12 Reinstallation of the front covers NOTES Fully make sure that the front covers are installed securely Always ti...

Page 45: ...gher Temperature Thepermissiblesurroundingairtemperatureoftheinverterisbetween 10 Cand 50 C 10 Cand 40 C at the SLD rating Always operate the inverter within this temperature range Operation out sidethisrangewillconsiderablyshorten the service livesof the semiconductors parts capacitors and others Take the following measures to keep the surrounding air temperature of the inverter within the specif...

Page 46: ...ce defined in JEM1103 Control Equipment Insulator is humidity of 45 to 85 Measures against high humidity Make the enclosure enclosed and provide it with a hygroscopic agent Provide dry air into the enclosure from outside Provide a space heater in the enclosure Measures against low humidity Air with proper humidity can be blown into the enclosure from outside Also when installing or inspecting the ...

Page 47: ...closure Inplaces where explosion may be caused by explosive gas dust or dirt an enclosure cannot be used unless it structurallycomplieswiththeguidelines andhaspassedthespecified tests This makestheenclosure itselfexpensive includingthe testcharges The bestwayis toavoidinstallationin such placesandin stall the inverter in a non hazardous place High altitude Use the inverter at an altitude of within...

Page 48: ... etc Cooling system Enclosure structure Comment Natural cooling Natural ventilation enclosed open type I001000E This system is low in cost and generally used but the enclosure size increases as the inverter capacity increases This system is for relatively small capacities Natural ventilation totally enclosed type I001001E Being a totally enclosed type this system is the most appropriate for hostil...

Page 49: ...bove the inverter is required as a heat dissipation space For the FR F820 00250 5 5K or lower and FR F840 00126 5 5K or lower allow 1 cm or more clearance WhenusingtheFR F820 01250 30K orlowerandFR F840 00620 30K orloweratthesurrounding air temperature of 40 C or less 30 C or less for the SLD rated inverter side by side installation 0 cm clearance is available For replacing the cooling fan of the ...

Page 50: ...sing inverter failures Whenmounting multiple inverters fully take caution not to make the surrounding air temperature of the inverter higher than the permissible value by providing ventilation and increasing the enclosure size Arrangement of the ventilation fan and inverter Heat generated in the inverter is blown up from the bottom of the unit as warm air by the cooling fan When installing a venti...

Page 51: ...outside the enclosure using a panel through attachment FR A8CN For the FR F840 04320 185K or higher attachment is not necessary when the heatsink is to be protruded For a panel cut dimension drawing and an installation procedure of the panel through attachment FR A8CN to the inverter refer to a manual of FR A8CN Protrusion of heatsink of the FR F840 04320 185K or higher Panel cutting Cut the panel...

Page 52: ...t and removal of a rear side installation frame I002802E I002803E Fig 2 18 Installation on the control cabinet wall NOTES Having a cooling fan the cooling section which comes out of the enclosure cannot be used in the environment of water drops oil mist dust etc Be careful not to drop screws dust etc into the inverter and cooling fan section Shift Upper installation frames Shift Lower installation...

Page 53: ... input Terminal 4 input Current input 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC 4 20mA DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 5 V DC 0 5V DC 0 10 V DC PU connector Connector for plug in option connection Safety stop signal Relay output 1 Fault output Relay output 2 Running Instantaneous power failure Up to frequency Overload Frequency detection Open collector output common Sink source common Analog signal output 0 to 10 V DC RS 485 ...

Page 54: ...r to page 5 255 It is recommended to use 2 W 1kΩ when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently DonotuseterminalsPRandPX Thejumpermayormaynotbeattacheddependingontheinverter Refer to page 2 34 Do not connect the DC power supply under DC feeding mode to terminal P3 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment Pr 195 Pr 196 Refer to page 5 231 The funct...

Page 55: ...put Terminal 4 input Current input 0 5V DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC PU connector Connector for plug in option connection Safety stop signal Relay output 1 Fault output Relay output 2 Running Instantaneous power failure Up to frequency Overload Frequency detection Open collector output common Sink source common Indicator Frequency meter etc Analog signal...

Page 56: ...nal is changed frequently DonotuseterminalsPRandPX Thejumpermayormaynotbeattacheddependingontheinverter Refer to page 2 34 Do not connect the DC power supply under DC feeding mode to terminal P3 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment Pr 195 Pr 196 Refer to page 5 231 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment Pr 19...

Page 57: ...ignal analog Auxiliary input Terminal 4 input Current input 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC PU connector Safety stop signal Relay output 1 Fault output Relay output 2 Running Instantaneous power failure Up to frequency Overload Frequency detection Open collector output common Sink source common Analog signal output 0 to 10 V DC Frequency setting poten...

Page 58: ...PRandPX Thejumpermayormaynotbeattacheddependingontheinverter Refer to page 2 34 Do not connect the DC power supply under DC feeding mode to terminal P3 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment Pr 195 Pr 196 Refer to page 5 231 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment Pr 190 to Pr 194 Refer to page 5 231 No function...

Page 59: ...l analog Auxiliary input Terminal 4 input Current input 0 5V DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC PU connector Connector for plug in option connection Safety stop signal Relay output 1 Fault output Relay output 2 Running Instantaneous power failure Up to frequency Overload Frequency detection Open collector output common Sink source common Indicator Frequency me...

Page 60: ... Do not connect the DC power supply under DC feeding mode to terminal P3 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment Pr 195 Pr 196 Refer to page 5 231 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment Pr 190 to Pr 194 Refer to page 5 231 The terminal FM can be used to output pulse trains as open collector output by setting Pr ...

Page 61: ...onnect the brake unit FR BU2 FR BU BU power regeneration common converter FR CV power regeneration converter MT RC high power factor converter FR HC2 or DC power supply under DC feeding mode When connecting multiple inverters FR F820 00770 18 5K to 01250 30K or FR F840 00470 22K to 01800 75K in parallel using the FR CV or FR HC2 always use either of the terminal P or P3 for the connection Do not u...

Page 62: ...R F820 01250 30K FR F840 00470 22K FR F840 00620 30K FR F820 01540 37K FR F840 00770 37K I002361E I002362E Tab 2 10 Terminal layout and wiring 1 R L1 S L2 T L3 N P PR PX R1 L11 S1 L21 M Jumper CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply Jumper M R L1 S L2 T L3 N P PR R1 L11 S1 L21 PX Jumper CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply Jumper N P PR PX R1 L11 S1 L21 R L1 S L2 T L3 Jumper CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply Jumper...

Page 63: ...840 00930 45K to FR F840 01800 75K I002365E I003008E FR F840 02160 90K FR F840 02600 110K FR F840 05470 250K to FR F840 06830 315K I002367E I002804E Tab 2 10 Terminal layout and wiring 2 R L1S L2T L3 N P P1 R1 L11 S1 L21 Jumper CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply Jumper M R L1 S L2 T L3 N P P1 M R1 L11 S1 L21 P CHARGE lamp Power supply Jumper DC reactor Motor R L1 S L2 T L3 N P P R1 L11 S1 L21 CHARGE l...

Page 64: ...he inverter Doing so will damage the inverter Connect the motor to U V and W The phase need to be matched When wiring the inverter main circuit conductor of the FR F840 05470 250K or higher tighten a nut from the right side of the conductor When wiring two wires place wires on both sides of the conductor Refer to the drawing For wiring use bolts nuts provided with the inverter I003009E Fig 2 23 Co...

Page 65: ... T L3 U V W Earthing ground ing cable 00046 0 75K to 00105 2 2K M4 1 5 2 4 2 4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2 5 2 5 2 5 00167 3 7K M4 1 5 5 5 4 5 5 4 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 12 12 4 4 4 00250 5 5K M4 1 5 5 5 4 5 5 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 6 6 6 00340 7 5K M5 2 5 14 5 8 5 14 8 14 5 5 6 8 16 10 16 00490 11K M5 2 5 14 5 14 5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16 00630 15K M5 2 5 22 5 22 5 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00770 18 5K M6 4 4 38 6 ...

Page 66: ... 30K M6 4 4 22 6 22 6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00770 37K M6 4 4 22 6 22 6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00930 45K M8 7 8 38 8 38 8 38 38 38 22 1 2 50 50 25 01160 55K M8 7 8 60 8 60 8 60 60 60 22 1 0 1 0 50 50 25 01800 75K M8 7 8 60 8 60 8 60 60 60 22 1 0 1 0 50 50 25 02160 90K M10 14 7 60 10 60 10 60 60 60 22 1 0 1 0 50 50 25 02600 110K M10 14 7 80 10 80 10 80 80 80 22 3 0 3 0 70 70 35 03250 132K M10 M...

Page 67: ...higher it is the gauge of a cable with the continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90 C THHN cable It assumes a surrounding air temperature of 40 C or lower and in enclosure wiring Selection example for use mainly in the United States For the FR F820 00770 18 5K or lower and the FR F840 00930 45K or lower it is the gauge of a cable with the continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70 C ...

Page 68: ... screw size Tighten ing torque Nm Crimping terminal Cable gauge HIV cables etc mm AWG MCM PVC cables etc mm R L1 S L2 T L3 U V W R L1 S L2 T L3 U V W P P1 Earthing ground ing cable R L1 S L2 T L3 U V W R L1 S L2 T L3 U V W Earthing ground ing cable 00023 0 75K to 00083 3 7K M4 1 5 2 4 2 4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2 5 2 5 2 5 00126 5 5K M4 1 5 2 4 2 4 2 2 3 5 3 5 12 14 2 5 2 5 4 00170 7 5K M4 1 5 5 5 4 5 5 4 ...

Page 69: ...cable with the continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70 C PVC cable It assumes a surrounding air temperature of 40 C or lower and the wiring distance of 20 m or shorter For the FR F820 01250 30K or higher and the FR F840 01160 55K or higher it is the gauge of a cable with the continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90 C XLPE cable It assumes a surrounding air temperature of 40 C or l...

Page 70: ...20 01160 55K or lower and the FR F840 01800 75K or lower connect a surge voltage suppressionfilter FR ASF H FR BMF H atthe output side ofthe inverter Forthe FR F840 01800 75K or higher connect a sine wave filter MT BSL BSC at the output side of the inverter Pr 72 setting carrier frequency FR F820 00046 0 75K FR F840 00023 0 75K FR F820 00077 1 5K FR F840 00038 1 5K FR F820 00105 2 2K or higher FR ...

Page 71: ...f the fast response current limit operation or even to an inverter failure It may also cause a malfunction or fault of the equipment connected ON the inverter out put side Stray capacitances of the wiring differ by the installation condition use the total wiring length in the table above as reference values If the fast response current limit function malfunc tions disable this function Refer to Pr...

Page 72: ...earthing grounding for the inverter If independent earthing grounding I is not available use II common earthing grounding in the figure below where the inverter is connected with the other equipment at an earthing grounding point Donotusetheotherequipment searthing grounding cabletoearth ground the inverter as shown in III A leakage current containing many high frequency components flows into the ...

Page 73: ...rthing the drive NOTE To be compliant with the EU Directive Low Voltage Directive refer to the Installation Guideline I Independent earthing Good II Common earthing Good III Common earthing cable Not allowed Inverter Other equipment Inverter Other equipment Inverter Other equipment ...

Page 74: ... 5 140 RT Second function selection Turn ON the RT signal to enable the second function When the second function such as second torque boost and second V F base frequency is set turning ON the RT signal enables the selected function Input resistance 4 7 kΩ Voltage when contacts are open 21 to 27 V DC When contacts are short circuited 4 to 6 mA DC 5 291 MRS Output stop Turn ON the MRS signal 20 ms ...

Page 75: ...sition to select current input 0 to 20 mA When voltage is input Input resistance 10 kΩ 1 kΩ Maximum permissiblevoltage 20 V DC When current is input Input resistance 245 Ω 5 Ω Permissible maximum current 30 mA 5 255 4 Frequency setting current Inputting 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V provides the maximum output frequency at 20 mA and makes input and output proportional This input signal is va...

Page 76: ...0 OL Overload warning Switched to LOW when stall prevention is activated by the stall prevention function Switched to HIGH when stall prevention is cancelled 5 194 IPF Instantaneouspower failure Switched to LOW when an instantaneous power failure occurs or when the undervoltage protection is activated 5 415 5 432 FU Frequency detection Switched to LOW when the inverter output frequency is equal to...

Page 77: ...nal function description Rated specification Refer to page S1 Safety stop input Channel 1 The terminals S1 and S2 are used for the safety stop input signal for the safety relay module The terminals S1 and S2 are used at the same time dual channel Inverter output is shutoff by shortening opening between terminals S1 and SIC or between S2 and SIC In the initial status terminals S1 and S2 are shorted...

Page 78: ...logic The control logic of input signals is initially set to the sink logic SINK for the FM type The control logic of input signals is initially set to the source logic SOURCE for the CA type The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper con nector position I002370E Fig 2 26 Changing the control logic NOTES Make sure that the jumper connector is inst...

Page 79: ...nt flows from the corresponding signal input terminal Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals I001029E_C Fig 2 27 Changing the control logic RUN RUN TB1 TB1 TB17 TB18 Current flow concerning the input output signals when source logic is selected Current flow concerning the input output signals when sink logic is selected Current...

Page 80: ...elow Do not connect terminal SD of the inverter with the terminal 0 V of the external power supply When using terminals PC SD as a 24 V DC power supply do not install an external power supply in parallel with the inverter Doing so may cause a malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable currents Fig 2 28 Using an external power supply in connection with the outputs of a PLC source logic I002372E...

Page 81: ...rminal or the single wire into a socket of the terminal Strip off the sheath for the below length If the length of the sheath peeled is too long a short circuit may occur with neighbouring wires If the length is too short wires might come off Wire the stripped cable after twisting it to prevent it from becoming loose In addition do not solder it I002373E Fig 2 30 Terminal layout I002397E Fig 2 31 ...

Page 82: ... wires into a socket I002396E Fig 2 32 Crimped wire end sleeves Cable gauge mm Blade terminal model Crimping tool With insulation sleeve Without insulation sleeve For UL wire 0 3 AI 0 34 10TQ CRIMPFOX 6 0 5 AI 0 5 10WH AI 0 5 10WH GB 0 75 AI 0 75 10GY A 0 75 10 AI 0 75 10GY GB 1 AI 1 10RD A 1 10 AI 1 10RD 1000GB 1 25 1 5 AI 1 5 10BK A 1 5 10 AI 1 5 10BK 1000GB 0 75 for two wires AI TWIN 2 0 75 10G...

Page 83: ...cal to the open close button In case the blade tip slips it may cause an inverter damage or injury Fig 2 35 Wire removal I002400E NOTES Pulling out the wire forcefully without pushing the open close button all the way down may dam age the terminal block Use a small flathead screwdriver tip thickness 0 4 mm tip width 2 5 mm If a flathead screwdriver with a narrow tip is used terminal block may be d...

Page 84: ...RES AU CS Every contact input terminal is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler Terminal 5 is a common terminal for the frequency setting terminals 2 1 or 4 and the analog outputterminals AM CA Itshouldbeprotectedfromexternalnoiseusingashieldedortwisted cable Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminals RUN SU OL IPF FU The contact input circuit is ...

Page 85: ... common terminal of the connected control circuit terminal When connecting an external power supply to the terminal PC however connect the shield of the power supply cable to the negative side of the external power supply Do not directly earth ground the shield to the enclosure etc Alwaysapplyavoltagetothefaultoutputterminals A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 viaarelaycoil lamp etc For the FR F820 03160 75K or hi...

Page 86: ...nals R1 L11andS1 L21areprovidedtoholdafaultsignal Inthiscase connectthepowersupplyterminals R1 L11 and S1 L21 of the control circuit to the input side of the MC Do not connect the power cable to incorrect terminals Doing so may damage the inverter FR F820 00250 5 5K or lower FR F840 00126 5 5K or lower Remove the upper screws Remove the lower screws Remove the jumper Connect the separate power sup...

Page 87: ...170 7 5K to FR F840 00380 18 5K Remove the upper screws Remove the lower screws Remove the jumper Connect the separate power supply cable for the control circuit to the upper terminals R1 L11 S1 L21 I002847E Fig 2 41 Detailed view of the terminals T L3 S L2 R L1 S1 L21 R1 L11 Main circuit terminal block ...

Page 88: ...s supplied from other than the input side of the MC The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from R1 L11 and S1 L21 differs according to the inverter capacity If the main circuit power is switched OFF for 0 1 s or more then ON again the inverter is reset and a fault output will not be held R1 L11 S1 L21 R L1 S L2 T L3 R1 L11 S1 L21 MC Main power supply FR F820 00770 18 5K to 01...

Page 89: ...er while supplying 24 V external power starts the 24 V external power supply operation Turning ON the main circuit power stops the 24 V external power supply operation and enables the normal operation Item Rated specification Input voltage 23 to 25 5 V DC Input current 1 4 A or less Tab 2 24 Specification of the applicable 24 V external power supply Model Manufacturer S8JX N05024C Specifications C...

Page 90: ...ply operation can be confirmed even when the operation panel is removed During the 24 V external power supply operation the 24 V external power supply operation signal EV isoutput TousetheEVsignal set 68 positivelogic or 168 negativelogic inoneofPr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign function to an output terminal I002380E Fig 2 43 Confirming the 24 V external power supply i...

Page 91: ...ower supply specification may flow at power ON Confirm that the power supply and other devices are not affected by the inrush cur rent and the voltage drop caused by it Depending on the power supply the inrush current pro tection may be activated to disable the power supply Select the power supply and capacity carefully When the wiring length between the external power supply and the inverter is l...

Page 92: ...dule or the safety programmable controller Terminal symbol Terminal function description S1 For input of the safety stop channel 1 Between S1 and SIC S2 and SIC Open In safety stop mode Short Other than the safety stop mode S2 For input of the safety stop channel 2 SIC Common terminal for S1 and S2 SO Outputs when an alarm or failure is detected The signal is output when no internal safety circuit...

Page 93: ...t terminal Output terminal Output signal Inverter running status Operation panel indication S1 S2 SO SAFE E SAF SA OFF OFF OFF Output shutoff Safe state Not displayed Not displayed ON Normal ON ON ON OFF Drive enabled Not displayed Not displayed Normal ON OFF OFF OFF Output shutoff Safe state Displayed Displayed Normal OFF ON OFF OFF Output shutoff Safe state Displayed Displayed Normal OFF OFF ON ...

Page 94: ...g table and assign the function by Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection The use of the SAFE signal has not been certified for compliance with safety standards For more details refer to the Safety stop function instruction manual Find a PDF copy of this manual in the CD ROM enclosed with the product Output signal Pr 190 to Pr 196 settings Positive logic Negative logic SAFE 80 180 ...

Page 95: ...nector enables communication operation from a personal computer etc When the PU connector is connected with a personal FA or other computer by a communication cable a user program can run to monitor the inverter or read and write parameters Communication can be performed with the Mitsubishi inverter protocol computer link operation For the details refer to page 5 453 I003011E Fig 2 45 Connecting a...

Page 96: ...emory device The parameter setting data copied in the USB memory device can be copied to other inverters This function is useful in backing up the parameter setting or for sharing the parameter setting among multiple inverters The parameter setting file can be copied onto a personal computer from the USB memory device and edited using FR Configurator2 5 573 Trace The monitored data and output stat...

Page 97: ... setting and monitoring can be performed by FR Configurator2 LED display status Operating status OFF No USB connection ON The communication is established between the inverter and the USB device Flickering rapidly The USB memory device is being accessed Do not remove the USB memory device Flickering slowly Error in the USB connection Tab 2 31 Operating status of the USB host NOTES Do not connect d...

Page 98: ...col For the details refer to page 5 455 Item Specification Conforming standard EIA 485 RS 485 Transmission format Multidrop link Communication speed maximum 115200 bps Overall length 500 m Connection cable Twisted pair cable 4 pairs Tab 2 33 Specifications of the RS 485 terminal block I002384E Fig 2 47 RS 485 terminal block NOTE Upon delivery the FR F800 E inverter models are not equipped with the...

Page 99: ...sistor must be within 5 m each Even when the wires are twisted the cable length must be within 10 m It is recommended to install an external thermal relay to prevent overheat of the discharging resistor For the connection method of the discharging resistor refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR BU2 I002408E_B Fig 2 48 Connection example with the GRZG type discharging resistor Brake unit Dischar...

Page 100: ... BR mustbewithin 5meach Even when thewireistwisted thecable length must be within 10 m The contact between TH1 and TH2 is closed in the normal status and is open at a fault NOTES Set 1 in Pr 0 Brake mode selection of the FR BU2 to use a GRZG type discharging resistor Do not remove the jumper across terminals P and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor FR HEL I002409E_B Fig 2 49 Connection example...

Page 101: ...ween the inverter and brake unit FR BU2 and between the brake unit FR BU2 and resistor unit MT BR5 must be within 5 m each Even when the wire is twisted the cable length must be within 10 m The contact between TH1 and TH2 is open in the normal status and is closed at a fault The CN8 connector used with the MT BU5 type brake unit is not used I002410E_B Fig 2 50 Connection example with the MT BR5 ty...

Page 102: ...class install a stepdown transformer The wiring distance between the inverter and brake unit FR BU2 and between the brake unit FR BU and discharging resistor unit FR BR must be within 5 m each Even when the cable is twisted the wiring length must be within 10 m I002771E_B Fig 2 51 Connection with the brake unit FR BU NOTES If the transistors in the brake unit should becomes faulty the resistor wil...

Page 103: ... unit BU NOTES The wiring distance between the inverter and brake unit BU type and between the brake unit BU type and discharging resistor must be within 2 m each Even when the cable is twisted the wiring length must be within 5 m If the transistors in the brake unit should becomes faulty the resistor will overheat and result in a fire Install a magnetic contactor on the inverter s input side and ...

Page 104: ...ion mode at the time of an instantaneous power failure Assign the IPF signal to an FR HC2 terminal Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR HC2 Always connect the FR HC2 terminal RDY to a terminal where the X10 signal or MRS signal is assigned in the inverter Always connect the FR HC2 terminal SE to the inverter terminal SD Not connecting these terminals may damage the FR HC2 Always connect the R L1 ...

Page 105: ...rminals R L1 S L2 and T L3 and the voltage phases of terminals R4 L14 S4 L24 and T4 L34 must be matched The control logic sink logic source logic of the high power factor converter and the inverter must be matched Refer to page 2 50 Do not connect a DC reactor FR HEL to the inverter when FR HC2 is connected ...

Page 106: ...ween N L and N Connecting the opposite polarity of terminals N and P will damage the inverter Use Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the terminals used for the X10 signal Refer to page 5 285 BesuretoconnectthepowersupplyandterminalsR L11 S L21 andT MC1 Operatingtheinverter without connecting them will damage the power regeneration common converter Always connect terminal ...

Page 107: ...inverter with the MT RC install a magnetic contactor MC at the input side of the inverter so that power is supplied to the inverter after 1 s or more has elapsed after powering ON the MT RC When power is supplied to the inverter prior to the MT RC the inverter and the MT RC may be damaged or the MCCB may trip or be damaged When connecting the power coordination reactor and others refer to Instruct...

Page 108: ...igher always connect a DC reactor Since theDC reactor FR HEL is electrically connected to the enclosure through mounting screws the DC reactor is earthed grounded by being securely mounted to the enclosure However if the DC reactor is not earthed grounded securely enough an earthing grounding cable may be used When using an earthing grounding cable for FR HEL H 55K or lower wire the cable to the i...

Page 109: ...e mounting screw tightening torque 0 33 Nm to 0 40 Nm Fix the left part of the communication option securely with the option mounting screw and place anotherterminaloftheearthing grounding cableon therightpartoftheoption andfixthecable terminal and the option with the option mounting screw tightening torque 0 33 Nm to 0 40 Nm If the screws are not tightened properly the connector may not be insert...

Page 110: ... on the Ethernet board Precautions for Ethernet communication In order to protect the inverter and the system against unauthorized access by external systems via network take security measures including firewall settings Depending on the network environment the inverter may not operate as intended due to delays or disconnection in communication Carefully consider the conditions and safety for the ...

Page 111: ...h 100 m between the hub and the inverter Number of cascade connection stages Up to 2 100BASE TX up to 4 10BASE T Interface RJ 45 Number of interfaces available 1 IP version IPv4 Tab 2 35 Specifications I003105E Fig 2 60 Ethernet connector position Communication speed Cable Connector Standard 100 Mbps Category 5 or higher STP shielded twisted pair straight cable RJ 45 connector 100BASE TX 10 Mbps C...

Page 112: ...s properly installed Do not use an Ethernet cable with a broken latch Doing so may cause the cable to come off or malfunction Do not connect the Ethernet cable to the PU connector The product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications The maximum distance between stations is specified as 100 m However the maximum distance may be shorter depending on the environment For detail...

Page 113: ... Removetheinverterfront cover Fordetailsonhowto removethefrontcover refertosection2 2 Remove the three mounting screws to remove the Ethernet board earth plate and the Ethernet board I003106E Fig 2 61 Removal of the Ethernet board NOTES For reinstalling the Ethernet board to the inverter remove the plug in option installed to the option connector 2 and install the Ethernet board and its earth plat...

Page 114: ...System configuration for Ethernet communication FR F800 E Installation and wiring 2 86 ...

Page 115: ... relays unnecessarily Suppression technique If the carrier frequency setting is high decrease the Pr 72 PWM frequency selection setting Note that motor noise increases Selecting Pr 240 Soft PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonic and surge suppression in the inverter s own line and other line operation can be performed with ...

Page 116: ...according to the inverter input side power factor which depends on the power supply voltage output frequency and load Especially for a completely electromagneticMCCB aslightlylargecapacitymustbeselectedsinceitsoperationcharacteristic varies with harmonic currents Check it in the data of the corresponding breaker As an earth leakage current breaker use the Mitsubishi earth leakage current breaker d...

Page 117: ...2 Leakage currents NOTE For star connection the amount of leakage current is approx 1 3 of the above value 1 5 3 7 2 2 7 5 1522 1 1 37 30 55 45 5 5 18 5 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 2 3 5 5 5 8 14 22 30 38 60 80 100 150 Example of leakage current of cable path per 1 km during the commercial power supply operation when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit 200 V 60 Hz Leakage...

Page 118: ...ut noise filter Leakage current Igi mA 1 without EMC filter For the leakage current of the inverter refer to the following table Leakage current Ig2 mA 33 50 m 1 65 1000 m Motor leakage current Igm mA 0 18 Total leakage current mA 3 00 6 66 Rated sensitivity current mA Ig 10 30 100 Tab 3 2 Estimation of the permanent flowing leakage current Voltage V EMC filter ON mA OFF mA Phase grounding 200 22 ...

Page 119: ... 536 class 1 and other applicable standards When the breaker is installed on the output side of the inverter it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics even if the effective value is within the rating In this case do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase lead ing to temperature rise The following models are standard breakers BV C1 BC V NVB NV L NV G2N ...

Page 120: ... electromagnetic noises which use magnetic contactors electromagnetic brakes many relays for example are installed near the inverter and the inverter may malfunction due to electromagnetic noises the following countermeasures must be taken Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate many electromagnetic noises to suppress electromagnetic noises Install data line filters page 3 8 to signal ...

Page 121: ...nduction noises may be propagated to the signal cables to cause malfunction of the devices and the following countermeasures must be taken Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I O cables Do not run the signal cables and power cables inverter I O cables in parallel with each othe...

Page 122: ...E Fig 3 6 Noise reduction examples NOTE For compliance with the EU EMC Directive refer to the Installation Guideline 34 1 TDK 39 1 30 1 13 1 Lot number Product name Cable fixing band mount Unit mm Inverter Enclosure Control power supply Sensor M 3 Motor Inverter power supply Do not earth ground shield but connect it to signal common cable Use a twisted pair shielded cable EMC filter Use 4 core cab...

Page 123: ...terON OFFconnectorsetting I002808E Fig 3 7 Built in EMC filter FILTER OFF ON FILTER OFF ON FILTER OFF ON FILTER OFF ON FILTER FILTER OFF ON FILTER FILTER OFF ON EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON OFF connector FR F820 00046 0 75K 00077 1 5K FR F820 00105 2 2K to 00250 5 5K FR F840 00126 5 5K or lower FR F820 00105 2 2K to 00250 5 5K FR F840 00023 0 75K to 00126 5 5K FR F820 00340 7 5K to 0...

Page 124: ...ifficult to disconnect the connector use a pair of needle nose pliers etc For FR F820 00077 1 5K or lower Remove the control circuit terminal block Refer to page 7 11 Connect the shorting wire to the corresponding terminal to enable or disable the filter Connect the wire to the terminal in the same way as general wiring of the control circuit terminal block Refer to page 2 53 After switching reins...

Page 125: ... channel power impedance To space distance wiring path Quantitative understanding Theoretical calculation possible Random occurrence quantitative grasping difficult Generated amount Nearly proportional to the load capacity Changes with the current variation ratio Gets larger as switching speed increases Affected equipment immunity Specified by standards per equipment Different depending on maker s...

Page 126: ...rs are now covered by the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage hereinafter referred to as the Specific Consumer Guidelines Specific Consumer Guidelines This guideline sets forth the maximum harmonic currents outgoing from a high voltage or especially high voltage receiving consumer who will install add or renew harmonic generating equipment...

Page 127: ...he rated capacity used here is used to calculate the generated harmonic amount and is different from the power supply capacity required for actual inverter drive Classification Circuit type Conversion coefficient Ki 3 Three phase bridge Capacitor smoothing Without reactor K31 3 4 With reactor AC side K32 1 8 With reactor DC side K33 1 8 With reactors AC DC sides K34 1 4 5 Self excitation three pha...

Page 128: ...57 72 39 96 30 98 0 49 0 2970 34 7 1931 1218 252 5 228 7 127 7 92 07 77 22 53 46 37 121 60 4 3660 42 8 2379 1501 311 1 281 8 157 4 113 5 95 16 65 88 45 147 73 5 4450 52 1 2893 1825 378 3 342 7 191 4 138 0 115 7 80 10 55 180 89 9 5450 63 7 3543 2235 463 3 419 7 234 4 169 0 141 7 98 10 Tab 3 11 Rated capacities and outgoing harmonic currents no reactor of inverter driven motors Applica ble motor kW ...

Page 129: ...wer factor converter FR HC2 with the accessories that come as standard Installation of power factor improving capacitor When used with a reactor connected in series the power factor improving correction capacitor can absorb harmonic currents Transformer multi phase operation Use two transformers with a phase angle difference of 30 as in Δ and Δ Δ combinations to provide an effect corresponding to ...

Page 130: ...r anexcessivepeakcurrentmayflowinthepowerinput circuit damaging the converter circuit To prevent this always install an optional AC reactor FR HAL I002423E Fig 3 11 Installation of a reactor R S T Z Y X U V W R L1 S L2 T L3 5000 5300 4000 3000 2000 1000 110165 247 330 420 550 kVA AC reactor FR HAL Inverter M 3 Capacities requiring installation of AC reactor Inverter capacity Power supply Power sup...

Page 131: ...low always use the start signal ON or OFF of STF STR signal to make a start or stop When the power supply is 400 V class install a stepdown transformer Connect the power supply terminals R1 L11 S1 L21 of the control circuit to the input side of the MC to hold an alarm signal when the inverter s protective circuit is activated At this time remove jumpers across terminals R L1 and R1 L11 and S L2 an...

Page 132: ...the manual contactor on the inverter s output side APMmotorisasynchronousmotorwithhigh performancemagnetsembeddedinside High voltage is generated at the motorterminals while themotor isrunning evenafterthe inverterpower is turned OFF In an application where the PM motor is driven by the load even after the inverter is powered OFF a low voltage manual contactor must be connected at the inverter s o...

Page 133: ...cy selection as indicated below according to the wiring length Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side For the FR F840 01160 55K or lower connect the surge voltage suppression filter FR ASF H FR BMF H to the output side For the FR F840 01800 75K or higher connect the sine wave filter MT BSL BSC to the output side Countermeasures With PM motor When the wiring length exceeds 50 m set 9 6 ...

Page 134: ...o the total wiring length 2 37 Countermeasures are taken against EMI The input output main circuit of the inverter includes high frequency components which may interfere with the communication devices such as AM radios used near the inverter In such case activate the EMC filter turn ON the EMC filter ON OFF connector to minimize interference 3 9 On the inverter s output side none of the power fact...

Page 135: ...ic contactor MC2 and the motor the damage may further spread If a failure has occurred between the MC2 and the motor a protection circuit such as using the OH signal input must be provided 5 333 A countermeasure is provided for power restoration after a power failure If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure provide an MC in the inverter s input side and als...

Page 136: ... and do not bundle them Run signal cables as far away as possible from power cables inverter I O cables Use shielded cables Install a ferrite core on the signal cable Example ZCAT3035 1330 by TDK 3 6 A countermeasure is provided for an overload operation When performing frequent starts stops by the inverter rise fall in the temperature of the transistor element of the inverter will repeat due to a...

Page 137: ...vates and the inverter trips the fault output signal ALM signal is output ALM signal is assigned to terminal A1B1C1 in the initial setting With this signal check that the inverter operates properly In addition negative logic can be set ON when the inverter is normal OFF when the fault occurs No Interlock method Check method Used signals Refer to page Inverter protective function operation Operatio...

Page 138: ...ing the inverter s deceleration time Checking the motor operating status by the start signal input to the inverter and inverter output current detection signal Theoutputcurrentdetectionsignal Y12signal isoutputwhentheinverteroperatesandcurrents flow in the motor Check if Y12 signal is being output while inputting a start signal to the inverter STF signal is a forward rotation signal and STR is a r...

Page 139: ...election referring to the table below Output signal Pr 190 to Pr 196 setting Positive logic Negative logic ALM 99 199 RY 11 111 RUN 0 100 Y12 12 112 Tab 3 17 Setting in positive and negative logic NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal ...

Page 140: ...al operation check Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the inverter by comparing the start signal to the inverter and detected speed of the speed detector or detected current of the current detector Note that the current is flowing through the motor while the motor coasts to stop even after the inverter s start signal is turned OFF For the logic check confi...

Page 141: ...FR DU08 FR F800 4 1 4 Basic operation 4 1 Operation panel FR DU08 4 1 1 Components of the operation panel FR DU08 To mount the operation panel FR DU08 on the enclosure surface refer to page 2 67 FR DU08 Fig 4 1 Operation panel FR DU08 ...

Page 142: ...ommand is not given even if the forward reverse command is given When the frequency command is the starting frequency or lower When the MRS signal is being input STOP RESET key Stops the operation commands Resets the inverter when the protection function is activated Setting dial The setting dial of the Mitsubishi inverters The setting dial is used to change the frequency and parameter settings Pr...

Page 143: ...r setting mode Display the present setting Example Parameter clear All parameter clear Faults history clear Parameter write is completed Parameter copy Operation for displaying faults history Past eight faults can be displayed The latest fault is ended by When no fault history exists is displayed Parameter setting mode at power ON Group parameter setting Function Function mode Trace function Long ...

Page 144: ... 5 5 568 Parameter all clear Clears and resets parameter settings to the initial values Calibration parameters and the offline auto tuning parameters are also cleared The communication parameters are not cleared For the details of the uncleared parameters refer to page A 5 5 568 Faults history clear Deletes the faults history 6 3 Parameter copy Copies the parameter settings saved in the inverter t...

Page 145: ...llowingcorrespondencesbetweentheactualalphanumericcharactersandthedigital characters displayed on the operation panel I002430E Fig 4 3 Correspondences between digital and actual characters operation panel 0 E e R 1 F f r 2 G g S s 3 H h T t 4 I i U 5 J j u 6 K k V 7 L l v 8 M m W 9 N w A n X x B b O Y y C o Z z c P p D d Q q ...

Page 146: ...g and flicker alternately Turn to read another parameter Press to show the setting again Press twice to show the next parameter Press three times to return to the monitor display of the frequency Tab 4 3 Setting the maximum output frequency NOTES If a parameter write condition is not satisfied a parameter write error appears Refer to page 6 9 When Pr 77 Parameter write selection 0 initial setting ...

Page 147: ...monitor the output voltage V indicator turns ON Tab 4 4 Monitoring of output current and output voltage NOTE Other monitored items such as output voltage and set frequency are also available Use Pr 52 Operation panel main monitor selection or Pr 774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 to Pr 776 Operation panel monitor selection 3 to change the setting Refer to page 5 198 Example Changing example S...

Page 148: ...n mode or in the External PU combined operation mode 1 Pr 79 Operation mode selection 3 select the monitor mode and then press the setting dial The present set frequency is displayed NOTE Use Pr 992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection to change the displayed indica tion Refer to page 5 198 ...

Page 149: ...al PU combined operation mode 1 appears For other settings refer to the table below Press to enter the setting External PU combined operation mode 1 Pr 79 3 is set Tab 4 6 One can immediately change parameter 79 by simultaneously pressing the PU EXT and MODE keys Operation panel indication Operation method Operation mode Start command Frequency command PU operation mode External STF STR Analog vol...

Page 150: ...ressed before pressing the SET key the easy setting mode is terminated and the display goes back to the monitor display If the easy setting mode is terminated while Pr 79 0 initial value the operation mode switches between the PU operation mode and the External operation mode Check the operation mode Reset by STOP RESET key is enabled The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr 79 3 are Multi...

Page 151: ...Displays only the simple mode parameters 0 CA type initial value Displays simple mode extended parameters 1 Displays parameters registered in the user group Tab 4 8 Setting of parameter 160 Pr Pr group Name Unit Initial value Range Application Refer to page FM CA 0 G000 Torque boost 0 1 6 0 30 Set this parameter to obtain a higher starting torque under V F control Also set this when a loaded motor...

Page 152: ...time 0 1 s 10 s 0 3600 s Sets the deceleration time 30 s 9 H000 C103 Electronic thermal O L relay 0 01A Rated inverter current 0 500 A Protects the motor from heat Set the rated motor current 5 150 0 1 A 0 3600 A 79 D000 Operation mode selection 1 0 0 4 6 7 Select the start and frequency command sources 5 119 125 T022 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 590 Hz Allows ...

Page 153: ...de of the operation panel Refer to section 4 5 1 page 4 13 The setting dial used as the potentiometer Refer to section 4 5 2 page 4 15 The ON OFF switches connected to terminals Refer to section 4 5 3 page 4 16 Voltage input signals Refer to section 4 5 4 page 4 18 Current input signals Refer to section 4 5 5 page 4 20 NOTE Use the operation panel FR DU08 to give a start command and a frequency co...

Page 154: ...uency Start acceleration constant speed Press or to start running The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr 7 Acceleration time and 30 00 Hz appears To change the set frequency perform the operation in above step 3 The previously set frequency appears Deceleration stop Press to stop The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr 8 Deceleration time and the motor stops rotating w...

Page 155: ...ncy Turn until appears The set frequency flickers The frequency flickers for about 5 s needs not to be pressed Tab 4 11 Use the digital dial like a potentiometer to perform operation NOTES If the display changes from flickering 60 00 to 0 00 Pr 161 Frequency setting key lock opera tion selection may be set to a value other than 1 Simply turning the setting dial will enable frequency setting whethe...

Page 156: ...hanging the operation mode Set 4 in Pr 79 PU and EXT indicators are lit For setting value change refer to page 4 9 Setting the frequency Turn ON the low speed switch RL Start acceleration constant speed Press or to start running The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr 7 Acceleration time and 10 00 Hz appears Deceleration stop Press to stop The frequency value on the indication decrea...

Page 157: ... 4 Pr 5 and Pr 6 In the initial setting when two or more of multi speed settings are simultaneously selected prior ity is given to the set frequency of the lower signal For example when RH and RM signals turn ON RM signal Pr 5 has a higher priority Maximum of 15 speed operation can be performed Parameters referred to Pr 4 to Pr 6 multi speed setting page 5 146 Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 102 Pr ...

Page 158: ...nitor display appears Changing the operation mode Set 4 in Pr 79 PU and EXT indicators are lit For setting value change refer to page 4 6 Start Press or FWD or REV flickers as no frequency command is given Acceleration constant speed Turn the potentiometer frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr 7 Acceleration time and 60 00 Hz...

Page 159: ...change the frequency 0 Hz at the minimum voltage input initial value 0 V adjust the calibra tion parameter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency Parameters referred to Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 102 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 102 Pr 79 Operation mode selection page 5 119 Pr 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency page 5 266 C2 Pr 902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequen...

Page 160: ...y appears Changing the operation mode Set 4 in Pr 79 PU and EXT indicators are lit For setting value change refer to page 4 6 Terminal 4 input selection Turn ON the terminal 4 input selection signal AU Input to the terminal 4 is enabled Start Press or FWD or REV flickers as no frequency command is given Acceleration constant speed Input 20 mA The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr 7...

Page 161: ...in frequency To change the frequency 0 Hz at the minimum current input initial value 4 mA adjust the cali bration parameter C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency Parameters referred to Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 102 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 102 Pr 79 Operation mode selection page 5 119 Pr 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency page 5 266 Pr 184 AU terminal function select...

Page 162: ... section 4 6 1 page 4 22 Switches multi speed setting Refer to section 4 6 2 page 4 24 Voltage input signals Refer to section 4 6 3 page 4 26 Current input signals Refer to section 4 6 5 page 4 28 NOTES Turn ON the STF STR signal to give a start command Use the operation panel FR DU08 setting dial to give a frequency command Set Pr 79 3 External PU combined operation mode 1 I002445E_G Fig 4 8 Exte...

Page 163: ...appears Deceleration stop Turn OFF the start switch STF or STR The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr 8 Deceleration time and the motor stops rotating with 0 00 Hz displayed Tab 4 15 Operate the inverter by using external signals NOTES When both the forward rotation switch STF and the reverse rotation switch STR are ON the motor cannot be started If both are turned ON while the moto...

Page 164: ...requency value on the indication decreases in Pr 8 Deceleration time and the motor stops rotating with 0 00 Hz displayed FWD or REV indicator turns OFF Turn OFF the high speed switch RH Tab 4 16 Operate the inverter by using external signals NOTES When both the forward rotation switch STF and the reverse rotation switch STR are ON the motor cannot be started If both are turned ON while the motor i...

Page 165: ...ic operation Basic operation procedure External operation FR F800 4 25 Parameters referred to Pr 4 to Pr 6 multi speed setting page 5 146 Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 102 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 102 ...

Page 166: ...rd rotation and REV indicator is lit during the reverse rotation Deceleration Turn the potentiometer frequency setting potentiometer counterclockwise slowly to full The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr 8 Deceleration time and the motor stops rotating with 0 00 Hz displayed FWD or REV indicator flickers Stop Turn OFF the start switch STF or STR FWD or REV indicator turns OFF Tab 4 ...

Page 167: ... the monitor frequency monitor Start Turn ON the start switch STF or STR then turn the potentiometer frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full Refer to steps and in section 4 6 3 Operate at 50 Hz Tab 4 18 Change the frequency of the maximum analog value NOTES To set the frequency at 0 V use the calibration parameter C2 Other adjustment methods for the frequency setting voltage gain ...

Page 168: ... time and 60 00 Hz appears FWD indicator is lit during the forward rotation and REV indicator is lit during the reverse rotation Deceleration Input 4 mA or less The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr 8 Deceleration time and the motor stops rotating with 0 00 Hz displayed FWD or REV indicator flickers Stop Turn OFF the start switch STF or STR FWD or REV indicator turns OFF Tab 4 19 O...

Page 169: ...he monitor frequency monitor Start Turn ON the start switch STF or STR then turn the potentiometer frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full Refer to steps and in section 4 6 5 Operate at 50 Hz Tab 4 20 Change the frequency of the maximum analog value NOTES To set the frequency at 4 mA use the calibration parameter C5 Other adjustment methods for the frequency setting current gain a...

Page 170: ...the indication increases in Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time and 5 00 Hz appears FWD indicator is lit during the forward rotation and REV indicator is lit during the reverse rotation Deceleration stop Turn OFF the start switch STF or STR The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time and the motor stops rotating with 0 00 Hz displayed FWD or REV...

Page 171: ...Keep pressing or The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time and 5 00 Hz appears Deceleration stop Release or The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time and the motor stops rotating with 0 00 Hz displayed Tab 4 22 JOG operation performed on the operation panel NOTES To change the running frequency chan...

Page 172: ...Basic operation procedure JOG operation Basic operation 4 32 ...

Page 173: ...each type of the inverter models Mark Control method Applied motor V F control Three phase induction motor Advanced magnetic flux vector control PM motor control IPM motor Inverter model Common designation FR F8 0 Standard model FR F8 2 Separated converter type FR F8 E Model with built in Ethernet board FR A8ETH Tab 5 1 Designation of the inverter model NOTE Upon delivery the FR F800 E inverter mo...

Page 174: ...e Customer setting FM CA Basic functions 0 G000 Torque boost 0 to 30 0 1 6 5 535 4 3 2 1 5 1 1 H400 Maximum frequency 0 to 120 Hz 0 01 Hz 120 Hz 5 176 60 Hz 2 H401 Minimum frequency 0 to 120 Hz 0 01 Hz 0 Hz 5 176 3 G001 Base frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 537 4 D301 Multi speed setting high speed 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 60 5 D302 Multi speed setting middle speed 0 to 590 Hz ...

Page 175: ...sation factor at double speed 0 to 200 9999 0 1 9999 5 180 Multi speed setting 24 to 27 D304to D307 Multi speed setting 4 speed to 7 speed 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 60 28 D300 Multi speed input compensation selection 0 1 1 0 5 146 29 F100 Acceleration deceleration pattern selection 0 to 3 6 1 0 5 107 30 E300 Regenerative function selection 0 to 2 10 11 20 21 100to102 110 111 120 121 1 0 5 55...

Page 176: ...Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 211 56 M041 Current monitoring reference 0 to 500 A 0 01 A Inverter rated current 5 211 0 to 3600 A 0 1 A Automatic restart 57 A702 Restart coasting time 0 0 1 to 30 s 9999 0 1 s 9999 5 415 5 423 58 A703 Restart cushion time 0 to 60 s 0 1 s 1 s 5 415 59 F101 Remote function selection 0 to 3 11 to 13 1 0 5 111 60 G030 Energy saving control selection 0 4 9 1 0 5 541 65 H300 Retry se...

Page 177: ... motor voltage 0 to 1000 V 0 1 V 200 V 5 41 5 303 5 316 400 V 84 C105 Rated motor frequency 10 to 400 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 41 5 303 5 316 89 G932 Speed control gain Advanced magnetic flux vector 0 to 200 9999 0 1 9999 5 303 90 C120 Motor constant R1 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 9999 5 303 5 316 5 426 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 91 C121 Motor constant R2 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 9999 5 303 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 ...

Page 178: ... 8 s 9999 0 1 s 9999 5 467 123 N027 PU communication waiting time setting 0 to 150 ms 9999 1 9999 5 467 124 N028 PU communication CR LF selection 0 1 2 1 1 5 467 125 T022 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 266 126 T042 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 266 PID operation 127 A612 PID control automatic switchover ...

Page 179: ... Stall prevention operation selection 0 to 31 100 101 1 0 5 180 157 M430 OL signal output timer 0 to 25 s 9999 0 1 s 0 s 5 180 158 M301 AM terminal function selection 1 to 3 5 to 14 17 18 21 24 34 50 52 to 54 61 62 67 69 70 86to96 98 1 1 5 211 159 A005 Automatic switchover frequency range from bypass to inverter operation 0 to 10 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 333 160 E440 User group read selection 0 1 99...

Page 180: ...10 188 T710 STOP terminal function selection 1 25 5 285 189 T711 RES terminal function selection 1 62 5 285 Output terminal function assignment 190 M400 RUN terminal function selection 0 to 5 7 8 10 to 19 25 26 35 39 to 42 45 to 54 57 64 to 68 70 to 80 82 85 90 to 96 98 to 105 107 108 110to116 125 126 135 139to142 145 to 154 157 164 to 168 170to 180 182 185 190 to196 198to208 211to 213 215 217to22...

Page 181: ... E701 Inrush current limit circuit life display 0 to 100 1 100 5 91 257 E702 Control circuit capacitor life display 0 to 100 1 100 5 91 258 E703 Main circuit capacitor life display 0 to 100 1 100 5 91 259 E704 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 0 1 1 0 5 91 260 E602 PWM frequency automatic switchover 0 1 1 1 5 88 Power failure stop 261 A730 Power failure stop selection 0 to 2 11 12 21 22 1 0 5 ...

Page 182: ... data length 0 1 1 0 N033 RS 485 communication stop bit length 0 1 1 1 334 N034 RS 485 communication parity check selection 0 to 2 1 2 5 467 335 N035 RS 485 communication retry count 0 to 10 9999 1 1 5 467 336 N036 RS 485 communication check time interval 0 to 999 8 s 9999 0 1 s 0 s 5 467 337 N037 RS 485 communication waiting time setting 0 to 150 ms 9999 1 ms 9999 5 467 338 D010 Communication ope...

Page 183: ... 9999 5 303 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 460 C222 Second motor constant L1 d axis inductance Ld 0 to 6000 mH 9999 0 1 mH 9999 5 303 5 316 0 to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 461 C223 Second motor constant L2 q axis inductance Lq 0 to 6000 mH 9999 0 1 mH 9999 5 303 5 316 0 to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 462 C224 Second motor constant X 0 to 100 9999 0 1 9999 5 303 0 01 463 C210 Second motor auto tuning setting status 0 1...

Page 184: ... 100 9999 0 1 9999 5 353 554 A604 PID signal operation selection 0 to 7 10 to 17 1 0 5 353 Current average value monitor 555 E720 Current average time 0 1 to 1 s 0 1 s 1 s 5 97 556 E721 Data output mask time 0 to 20 s 0 1 s 0 s 5 97 557 E722 Current average value monitor signal output reference current 0 to 500 A 0 01 A Inverter rated current 5 97 0 to 3600 A 0 1 A 560 A712 Second frequency search...

Page 185: ...o 50 0 1 10 5 346 595 A303 Amplitude compensation amount during acceleration 0 to 50 0 1 10 5 346 596 A304 Amplitude acceleration time 0 1 to 3600 s 0 1 s 5 s 5 346 597 A305 Amplitude deceleration time 0 1 to 3600 s 0 1 s 5 s 5 346 598 H102 Undervoltage level 350 to 430 V 9999 0 1 V 9999 5 161 599 T721 X10 terminal input selection 0 1 1 0 5 552 1 Electronic thermal O L relay 600 H001 First free th...

Page 186: ...er 3 0 1 to 9998 1 0 5 95 689 E715 Maintenance timer 3 warning output set time 0 to 9998 9999 1 9999 5 95 Electronic thermal O L relay 692 H011 Second free thermal reduction frequency 1 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 150 693 H012 Second free thermal reduction ratio 1 1 to 100 1 100 5 150 694 H013 Second free thermal reduction frequency 2 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 150 695 H014 Second free th...

Page 187: ...53 756 A653 Second PID proportional band 0 1 to 1000 9999 0 1 100 5 353 757 A654 Second PID integral time 0 1 to 3600 s 9999 0 1 s 1 s 5 353 758 A655 Second PID differential time 0 01 to 10 s 9999 0 01 s 9999 5 353 759 A600 PID unit selection 0 to 43 9999 1 9999 5 381 PID pre charge function 760 A616 Pre charge fault selection 0 1 1 0 5 385 761 A617 Pre charge ending level 0 to 100 9999 0 1 9999 5...

Page 188: ...5 s 9999 0 001 s 9999 5 264 834 G313 Torque control P gain 2 0 to 500 9999 1 9999 5 55 835 G314 Torque control integral time 2 0 to 500 ms 9999 0 1 ms 9999 5 55 837 G316 Torque detection filter 2 0 to 0 1 s 9999 0 001 s 9999 5 59 Additional function 849 T007 Analog input offset adjustment 0 to 200 0 1 100 5 264 Additional function 858 T040 Terminal 4 function assignment 0 4 9999 1 0 5 180 5 260 85...

Page 189: ...umulative power monitor digit shifted times 0 to 4 9999 1 9999 5 198 5 224 892 M200 Load factor 30 to 150 0 1 100 5 224 893 M201 Energy saving monitor reference motor capacity 0 1 to 55 kW 0 01 kW Inverter rated capacity 5 224 0 to 3600 kW 0 1 kW 894 M202 Control selection during commercial power supply operation 0 1 2 3 1 0 5 224 895 M203 Power saving rate reference value 0 1 9999 1 9999 5 224 89...

Page 190: ... Hz 5 266 C6 904 T401 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 0 to 300 0 1 20 5 266 126 905 T402 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 266 C7 905 T403 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 0 to 300 0 1 100 5 266 C12 917 T100 Terminal 1 bias frequency speed 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 0 Hz 5 266 C13 917 T101 Terminal 1 bias speed 0 to 300 0 1 0 5 266 C14 918 T102 Terminal 1 ga...

Page 191: ...1 100 5 381 977 E302 Input voltage mode selection 0 1 1 0 5 72 989 E490 Parameter copy alarm release 10 1 10 5 571 100 100 PU 990 E104 PU buzzer control 0 1 1 1 5 67 991 E105 PU contrast adjustment 0 to 63 1 58 5 67 Monitor function 992 M104 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection 0 to 3 5 to 14 17 18 20 23 to 25 34 38 40 to 45 50 to 57 61 62 64 67 to 69 81 to 96 98 100 1 0 5 198 997 H...

Page 192: ...g trigger channel 1 to 8 1 1 5 443 1036 A919 Analog trigger operation selection 0 1 1 0 5 443 1037 A920 Analog trigger level 600 to 1400 1 1000 5 443 1038 A930 Digital source selection 1ch 1 to 255 1 1 5 443 1039 A931 Digital source selection 2ch 2 5 443 1040 A932 Digital source selection 3ch 3 5 443 1041 A933 Digital source selection 4ch 4 5 443 1042 A934 Digital source selection 5ch 5 5 443 1043...

Page 193: ...n 1150 to 1199 A810 to A859 PLC function user parameters 1 to 50 0 to 65535 1 0 5 439 PID gain tuning 1211 A690 PID gain tuning timeout time 1 to 9999 s 1 s 100 s 5 373 1212 A691 Step manipulated amount 900 to 1100 0 1 1000 5 373 1213 A692 Step response sampling cycle 0 01 to 600 s 0 01 s 1 s 5 373 1214 A693 Timeout time after the maximum slope 1 to 9999 s 1 s 10 s 5 373 1215 A694 Limit cycle outp...

Page 194: ... A456 PID input pressure fault operation selection 0 1 1 0 5 404 Ethernet communication 1424 N650 Ethernet communication network number 1 to 239 1 1 5 522 1425 N651 Ethernet communication station number 1 to 120 1 1 5 522 1426 N641 Link speed and duplex mode selection 0 to 4 1 0 5 522 1427 N630 Ethernet function selection 1 502 5000 to 5002 5006 to 5008 5010 to 5013 9999 45237 61450 1 5001 5 522 1...

Page 195: ...t 1 0 to 100 9999 0 01 9999 5 373 1461 A684 PID multistage set point 2 0 to 100 9999 0 01 9999 5 373 1462 A685 PID multistage set point 3 0 to 100 9999 0 01 9999 5 373 1463 A686 PID multistage set point 4 0 to 100 9999 0 01 9999 5 373 1464 A687 PID multistage set point 5 0 to 100 9999 0 01 9999 5 373 1465 A688 PID multistage set point 6 0 to 100 9999 0 01 9999 5 373 1466 A689 PID multistage set po...

Page 196: ...Hz 5 189 1488 H531 Upper limit warning detection width 0 to 400 9999 0 1 20 5 189 1489 H532 Lower limit warning detection width 0 to 400 9999 0 1 20 5 189 1490 H533 Upper limit fault detection width 0 to 400 9999 0 1 9999 5 189 1491 H534 Lower limit fault detection width 0 to 400 9999 0 1 9999 5 189 1492 H535 Load status detection signal delay time load reference measurement waiting time 0 to 60 s...

Page 197: ...0340 7 5K or lower and FR F840 00170 7 5K or lower The initial value for the FR F820 00490 11K or higher and FR F840 00250 11K or higher Differs according to capacities 4 FR F820 00340 7 5K or lower FR F840 00170 7 5K or lower 2 FR F820 00490 11K to FR F820 02330 55K FR F840 00250 11K to FR F840 01160 55K 1 FR F820 03160 75K or higher FR F840 01800 75K or higher The value for the 200 V class The v...

Page 198: ... function group Tab 5 3 Changing to the grouped parameter numbers Operation Screen at power ON The monitor display appears Parameter setting mode Press to choose the parameter setting mode The parameter number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number Turn until parameter display method appears Press initial value appears Changing to the group parameter display Turn to change the set ...

Page 199: ...read previously appears Parameter group selection Press several times until appears Parameter groups can now be selected Parameter group selection Turn until protective function parameter 4 appears Press to display and make the group parameters of the protective function parameter 4 selectable Parameter selection Turn until P H400 Maximum frequency appears Press to read the present set value initi...

Page 200: ...410 296 Password lock level 5 76 E411 297 Password lock unlock 5 76 E420 888 Free parameter 1 5 80 E421 889 Free parameter 2 5 80 E430 998 PM parameter initialization 5 48 E431 999 Automatic parameter setting 5 80 E440 160 User group read selection 5 85 E441 172 User group registered display batch clear 5 85 E442 173 User group registration 5 85 E443 174 User group clear 5 85 E490 989 Parameter co...

Page 201: ...g frequency 5 107 F201 141 Backlash acceleration stopping time 5 107 F202 142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 5 107 F203 143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 5 107 Tab 5 7 Setting of acceleration deceleration time and acceleration deceleration pattern Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Pr group Pr Name Referto page D000 79 Operation mode selection 5 119 5 128 D001 340 Communicat...

Page 202: ...try waiting time 5 167 H400 1 Maximum frequency 5 176 Tab 5 9 Protective function parameter 1 Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple H401 2 Minimum frequency 5 176 H402 18 High speed maximum frequency 5 176 H420 31 Frequency jump 1A 5 178 H421 32 Frequency jump 1B 5 178 H422 33 Frequency jump 2A 5 178 H423 34 Frequency jump 2B 5 178 H424 35 Frequency jump 3A 5 178 H425 36 Frequency jump 3B 5 17...

Page 203: ... M301 158 AM terminal function selection 5 211 M310 C0 900 FM CA terminal calibration 5 218 Tab 5 10 Monitor display and monitor output signal 1 M320 C1 901 AM terminal calibration 5 218 M321 867 AM output filter 5 218 M330 C8 930 Current output bias signal 5 218 M331 C9 930 Current output bias current 5 218 M332 C10 931 Current output gain signal 5 218 M333 C11 931 Current output gain current 5 2...

Page 204: ...g bias frequency 5 266 T201 C3 902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 5 266 T202 125 903 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 5 266 Tab 5 11 Multi function input terminal parameters 1 Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple T203 C4 903 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 5 266 T400 C5 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 5 266 T401 C6 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 5 266 T4...

Page 205: ...compensation 5 316 C185 721 Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width 5 316 C200 450 Second applied motor 5 297 C201 453 Second motor capacity 5 303 5 316 C202 454 Number of second motor poles 5 303 5 316 Tab 5 12 Motor constant parameters 1 Simple Simple Simple C203 51 Rated second motor current 5 150 5 303 5 316 C204 456 Rated second motor voltage 5 303 5 316 C205 457 Rated second mo...

Page 206: ...4 Cleaning forward rotation frequency 5 348 A426 1475 Cleaning forward rotation operation time 5 348 A427 1476 Cleaning stop time 5 348 Tab 5 13 Application parameters 1 A428 1477 Cleaning acceleration time 5 348 A429 1478 Cleaning deceleration time 5 348 A430 1479 Cleaning time trigger 5 348 A440 1361 Detection time for PID output hold 5 404 A441 1362 PID output hold range 5 404 A442 1370 Detecti...

Page 207: ... Tab 5 13 Application parameters 3 A680 573 4 mA input check selection 5 280 A681 777 4 mA input check operation frequency 5 280 A682 778 Current input check filter 5 280 A683 1460 PID multistage set point 1 5 373 A684 1461 PID multistage set point 2 5 373 A685 1462 PID multistage set point 3 5 373 A686 1463 PID multistage set point 4 5 373 A687 1464 PID multistage set point 5 5 373 A688 1465 PID ...

Page 208: ...pplication parameters 5 Pr group Pr Name Referto page N000 549 Protocol selection 5 459 N001 342 Communication EEPROM write selection 5 459 N002 539 MODBUS RTU communication check time interval 5 488 N010 349 Communication reset selection 5 459 N011 500 Communication error execution waiting time 5 459 N012 501 Communication error occurrence count display 5 459 N013 502 Stop mode selection at commu...

Page 209: ...3 Ethernet command source selection IP address 3 range specification 5 522 N675 1454 Ethernet command source selection IP address 4 range specification 5 522 Pr group Pr Name Referto page Tab 5 14 Operation via communication and its settings 2 N681 1124 Station number in inverter to inverter link 5 635 N682 1125 Number of inverters in inverter to inverter link system 5 635 Pr group Pr Name Referto...

Page 210: ...compensation time constant 5 566 G205 247 Constant power range slip compensation selection 5 566 G211 820 Speed control P gain 1 5 55 G212 821 Speed control integral time 1 5 55 G213 824 Torque control P gain 1 current loop proportional gain 5 55 G214 825 Torque control integral time 1 current loop integral time 5 55 G216 827 Torque detection filter 1 5 59 G224 828 Parameter for manufacturer setti...

Page 211: ... conditions are not satisfied select V F control Otherwise malfunctions such as insufficient torque uneven rotation may occur For the motor capacity the rated current should be equal to or less than the inverter rated cur rent It must be 0 4 kW or higher Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than the inverter rated current will cause torque ripples etc and degrade the speed and ...

Page 212: ...otor described in the table below is used For the motor capacity the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the inverter rated current It must be 0 4 kW or higher Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than the inverter rated current will cause torque ripples etc and degrade the speed and torque accuracies As a reference select the motor with the rated motor current ...

Page 213: ...number of motor poles must be set to select Advanced magnetic flux vector control or PM motor control Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles in Pr 81 Number of motor poles Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 71 C100 Applied motor 0 0 to 6 13 to 16 20 23 24 40 43 44 50 53 54 70 73 74 210 213 214 240 243 244 8090 8093 8094 9090 9093 9094 By se...

Page 214: ...s are invalid Input terminal function selection Pr 178 to Pr 189 V F switchover signal X18 Start time tuning start external input signal X28 Output terminal function selection Pr 190 to Pr 196 Electronic thermal O L relay pre alarm signal THP Start time tuning completion signal Y39 NOTES Since current is not detected and voltage is not output monitors related to current and voltage such as output ...

Page 215: ...ency PID deviation Fault display Input terminal status Frequency setting value Output terminal status Running speed Option input terminal status Converter output voltage Option output terminal status Electric thermal relay load factor Motor thermal load factor Output current peak value Inverter thermal load factor Converter output voltage peak value PTC thermistor value Load meter PID measured val...

Page 216: ...l selects V F control V F control when Pr 453 or Pr 454 is set to 9999 When Pr 450 is set to the IPM motor MM EFS or MM THE4 PM motor control is enabled even if Pr 453 9999 or Pr 454 9999 First motor control method Second motor control method RT signal ON Pr 450 setting value Pr 453 Pr 454settingvalue V F control V F control 9999 9999 Advanced magnetic flux vector control Induction motor Other tha...

Page 217: ...ber of motor poles V F control is performed when the setting is 9999 initial value Motor Pr 71 setting Remarks Mitsubishi standard motor Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF JR 0 initial value 3 4 SF JR 4P 1 5 kW or lower 20 SF HR 40 Others 0 3 Offline auto tuning is required Mitsubishi constant torque motor SF JRCA 4P 1 SF HRCA 50 Other SF JRC etc 1 13 Offline auto tuning is required Mitsubishi hi...

Page 218: ...d between the inverter and the motor Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 89 G932 Speed control gain Advanced magnetic flux vector 9999 0 to 200 Makes adjustments to keep the motor speed constant during var...

Page 219: ...dvanced magnetic flux vector Pr 569 Pr 89 Tab 5 18 Switching the parameters by using the RT signal NOTES The RT signal is a second function selection signal The RT signal also enables other second func tions Refer to page 5 291 RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to another termina...

Page 220: ...ter initialization Turn until IPM parameter initialization appears Setting value display Press to read the present set value initial value appears Changing the setting value Turn to change the set value to then press and flicker alternately The setting is completed Tab 5 19 Selecting the PM motor control by performing parameter initialization Setting Description 0 Parameter settings for an inducti...

Page 221: ...e Description 998 E430 PM parameter initialization 0 0 Parameter settings for an induction motor frequency The parameter settings required to drive an induction motor are set 12 For IPM motor MM EFS 1500 r min specification MM THE4 Parameter setting rotations per minute The parameters settings required to drive an IPM motor are set 14 For IPM motor MM EFS 3000 r min specification Parameter setting...

Page 222: ... to their initial values The purpose of Pr 998 is not to change the display units Use Pr 144 Speed setting switchover to change the display units between rotations per minute and frequency Pr 144 enables switching of display units between rotations per minute and frequency without ini tializing the parameter settings Example Changing the Pr 144 setting between 6 and 106 switches the display units ...

Page 223: ...cy 1 r min 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 20 Acceleration deceleration reference frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz Rated motor rotations per minute Pr 84 Rated motor frequency Pr 84 1 r min 0 01 Hz 22 Stall prevention operation level 120 110 Short time motor torque 0 1 37 Speed display 0 0 1 55 Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz Rated motor rotations per minute Pr 84 Rated motor frequency Pr 84 1 r min 0 01 Hz 56 Curr...

Page 224: ...05 Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz Rated motor frequency Pr 84 Rated motor frequency Pr 84 0 01 Hz 557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current Inverter rated current Rated motor current Refer to page 8 4 Pr 859 Rated motor current Refer to page 8 4 Pr 859 0 01 A 0 1 A 870 Speed detection hysteresis 0 Hz Speed detection hysteresis rotations per minute 0 5 Hz Speed detectio...

Page 225: ...00 r min 200 Hz 40000 r min Number of motor poles 6 8 6 6 Short time motor torque 110 for SLD 120 for LD Minimum frequency rotations per minute 7 5 Hz 150 r min 10 Hz 150 r min 7 5 Hz 150 r min 15 Hz 300 r min Speed detection hysteresis frequency rotations per minute 0 5 Hz 10 r min 0 5 Hz 8 r min 0 5 Hz 10 r min 0 5 Hz 10 r min Overspeed detection level frequency rotations per minute 122 5 Hz 245...

Page 226: ...etting as required Perform offline auto tuning for a PM motor Pr 96 Refer to page 5 316 Configure the initial setting for the PM motor control using Pr 998 Refer to page 5 49 When the setting for the PM motor is selected in Pr 998 PM parameter initialization the PM motor control is selected PM on the operation panel FR DU08 is lit when the PM motor control is set 8009 Parameter rotations per minut...

Page 227: ...ange Description 820 G211 Speed control P gain 1 25 0 to 1000 The proportional gain during speed control is set Setting this parameter higher improves the trackability for speed command changes It also reduces the speed fluctuation caused by external disturbance 821 G212 Speedcontrolintegraltime 1 0 333 s 0 to 20 s The integral time during speed control is set Setting this parameter lower shortens...

Page 228: ...ime 1 lower shortens the return time to the original speed during speed fluctuation but setting it too low causes overshoot The value in parentheses is applicable with the FR F820 03160 75K or higher and FR F840 01800 75K or higher Actual speed gain is calculated as below when load inertia is applied JM Motor inertia JL Load inertia converted as the motor axis inertia Fig 5 5 Setting of the propor...

Page 229: ...8 to 0 9 2 Vibration or acoustic noise are generated from machines Set Pr 820 lower and Pr 821 higher Pr 820 Lower the setting by 10 s and set a value that satisfies the following condition The setting immediately before vibration noise starts occurring 0 8 to 0 9 Pr 821 If overshoots occur raise the setting by double the setting and set a value that satisfies the following condition The setting w...

Page 230: ...urs Adjust Pr 820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr 821 Speed control integral time 1 4 Hunting vibration or acoustic noise occurs in the motor or the machine Speed control gain is too high Set Pr 820 Speed control P gain 1 lower and Pr 821 Speed control integral time 1 higher Torque control gain is too high Set Pr 824 Torque control P gain 1 current loop proportional gain lower Motor wiring is incorr...

Page 231: ...o large Employing multiple primary delay filters Use Pr 837 if changing filter according to application Pr 837 Second function selection RT signal Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 827 G216 Torque detection filter 1 0 s 0 Without filter 0 001 to 0 1 s Set the time constant of primary delay filter torque feedback signal 837 G316 Torque detection filter 2 9999 0 to 0 1 s Second functio...

Page 232: ...ncy change increment amount setting P E201 Pr 295 5 70 To use the regeneration unit to increase the motor braking torque Regenerative brake selection P E300 Pr 30 5 552 To change the overload current rating specification Multiple rating setting P E301 Pr 570 5 71 To input a voltage between 480 V and 500 V Input voltage mode selection P E302 Pr 977 5 72 To prevent parameter rewriting Parameter writ...

Page 233: ... to 759 800 to 859 900 to 959 1000 to 1059 1100 to 1159 1200 to 1259 1300 to 1359 1400 to 1459 1500 to 1559 1600 to 1659 1700 to 1759 1800 to 1859 1900 to 1959 2000 to 2059 2100 to 2159 2200 to 2259 2300 to 2359 Set the hour and minute using the 24 hour clock 1000 and 100 digits 0 to 23 hours 10 and 1 digits 0 to 59 minutes For 23 59 set 2359 NOTES The clock s count up data is saved in the inverte...

Page 234: ...e clock of FR LU08 use the FR LU08 and set Pr 1006 to Pr 1008 I003015E Fig 5 7 Synchronization of internal clock with FR LU08 clock NOTES Time adjustment between the inverter internal clock and the FR LU08 is performed every one minute When the FR LU08 clock is initialized after the battery is exhausted for example the inverter inter nal clock is valid PREV NEXT SET STOP PU Hz 0 00 Hz Out 1 00 PRE...

Page 235: ...ctivated E101 Disconnected PU detection 0 0 Operation continues even when the PU is disconnected 1 The inverter output is shut off when the PU is disconnected E102 PU stop selection 1 0 Decelerates to a stop when the STOP key is pressed in PU operation mode only 1 Decelerates to a stop when the STOP key for PU is pressed in any of the PU external and communication operation modes E107 Reset limit ...

Page 236: ...et signal RES is input during operation the motor coasts since the inverter being reset shuts off the output Also the cumulative values of electronic thermal O L relay are cleared The input of the PU reset key is only enabled when the protective function is activated regardless of the P E100 and Pr 75 settings NOTES When the PU has been disconnected since before power ON the output is not shut off...

Page 237: ...103 and 114 to 117 if an electronic thermal O L relay or an overcurrent protective function E THM E THT E OC is activated while one of them has been already activated within 3 minutes the inverter will not accept any reset command RES signal etc for about 3 minutes from the second activation The reset limit function is available with the FR F820 03160 75K or higher and FR F840 01800 75K or higher ...

Page 238: ...gnal is being input Doing so will cause a sudden start of the motor which is dangerous Parameters referred to Pr 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence page 5 164 Pr 79 Operation mode selection page 5 119 Pr 250 Stop selection page 5 293 Pr 551 PU mode operation command source selection page 5 130 ...

Page 239: ...ng the setting value lowers the contrast The above parameter is displayed as a simple mode parameter only when the LCD operation panel FR LU08 and the parameter unit FR PU07 is connected Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 145 E103 PU display language selection 0 Japanese 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Spanish 5 Italian 6 Swedish 7 Finnish Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description...

Page 240: ...onnector connector A the USB host error can be can celled without performing an inverter reset Parameter copy refer to page 5 571 and the trace function refer to page 5 443 can be used when a USB device such as a USB memory is connected to the USB connector connector A When a device such as a USB charger is connected to the USB connector and an excessive current 500 mA or higher flows USB host err...

Page 241: ...ile dial and key operations are disabled appears When a setting dial or key operation is not performed for 2 s the monitor display appears To enable the setting dial and key operation again press MODE key for 2 s Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 161 E200 Frequency setting key lock operation selection 0 0 Setting dial frequency setting mode Key lock mode disabled 1 Setting dial poten...

Page 242: ...hange increment amount setting 0 0 Function invalid 0 01 The minimum change width when the set frequency is changed with the setting dial can be set 0 10 1 00 10 00 I002549E Fig 5 9 Magnitude when parameter 295 is set to 1 00 NOTES When machine speed display is selected in Pr 37 Speed display the minimum increments of change are determined by Pr 295 as well Note that the setting value may differ b...

Page 243: ... s inverse time characteristics Surrounding air temperature 50 C Pr Name Pr 570 setting Refer to 0 1 9 Electronic thermal O L relay SLD rated current LD rated current 5 150 22 Stall prevention operation level 110 120 5 180 48 Second stall prevention operation level 110 120 5 180 56 Current monitoring reference SLD rated current LD rated current 5 211 148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input 110 120...

Page 244: ... this function to pre vent parameter values from being rewritten by misoperation Pr 77 can be set at any time regardless of the operation mode or operation status Setting through communication is unavailable Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 977 E302 Input voltage mode selection 0 0 400 V class voltage protection level 1 500 V class voltage protection level NOTES Stand alone options ...

Page 245: ...ional band C1 901 AM terminal calibration 130 PID integral time C8 930 Current output bias signal 133 PID action set point C9 930 Current output bias current 134 PID differential time C10 931 Current output gain signal 158 AM terminal function selection C11 931 Current output gain current 160 User group read selection 990 PU buzzer control 232 to 239 Multi speed setting speed 8 to speed 15 991 PU ...

Page 246: ...change the parameter setting value stop the operation Pr Name Pr Name 22 Stall prevention operation level 297 Password lock unlock 75 Reset selection disconnected PU detection PU stop selection 345 346 DeviceNet communication 77 Parameter write selection 496 497 Remote output 79 Operation mode selection 656 to 659 Analog remote output 160 User group read selection 997 Fault initiation 296 Password...

Page 247: ...ction function selection 95 Online auto tuning selection 598 Undervoltage level 96 Auto tuning setting status 606 Power failure stop external signal input selection 135 to 139 Electronic bypass sequence parameter 660 661 662 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration 178 to 196 Input and output terminal function selection 673 SF PR slip amount adjustment operation selection 248 Self power manageme...

Page 248: ...n refer to page 5 130 This restricts parameter access from the command source that can write a parameter under the Network operation mode initially the RS 485 terminals or a communication option For the NET operation mode command source selection refer to page 5 130 Read write is enabled only for the simple mode parameters registered in the user group when Pr 160 9999 Pr 296 and Pr 297 are always ...

Page 249: ...e the parameters are returned to their initial values Writea four digitnumber 1000to 9998 in Pr 297asa password WritingisdisabledwhenPr 296 9999 When a password is registered parameter reading writing is restricted with the restric tion level set in Pr 296 until unlocking Pr 296 setting Password unlock error restriction Pr 297 display 0 to 6 99 No restriction Always displays 0 100 to 106 199 Restr...

Page 250: ...meter clear cannot be performed during the operation During the conditions where parameter reading is disabled Pr 296 any of 0 4 5 99 100 104 105 or 199 do not use FR Configurator2 It may not operate correctly The password unlocking method differs between the operation panel parameter unit RS 485 communication and communication option For the parameter clear and parameter all clear methods for the...

Page 251: ...97 9999 Pr 296 9999 Pr 297 0 to 4 read value Pr 296 100 to 106 199 Pr 297 5 read value Pr 296 Read Write Pr 297 Read Write Parameter clear execution All parameter clear execution Parameter copy execution Enabled Disabled Tab 5 31 Parameter operation during password lock unlock NOTES When Pr 296 4 5 104 or 105 password lock the setting screen for PU JOG frequency is not displayed in the parameter u...

Page 252: ...cally Users do not have to consider each parameter num ber Automatic parameter setting mode The read value is always 9999 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 888 E420 Free parameter 1 9999 0 to 9999 Any value can be input The settings are retained even if the inverter power is turned OFF 889 E421 Free parameter 2 9999 0 to 9999 NOTE Pr 888 and Pr 889 do not influence the operation of t...

Page 253: ...on parameters for the GOT connection with RS 485 terminals Controller Type in GOT FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO 12 Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT connection with a PU connector Controller Type in GOT FREQROL 800 Automatic Negotiation AUTO GOT Write 2 13 Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT connection with RS 485 terminals Controller Type i...

Page 254: ...74 Operation panel monitor selection 1 9999 9999 52 5 198 775 Operation panel monitor selection 2 9999 9999 53 776 Operation panel monitor selection 3 9999 9999 54 C42 934 PID display bias coefficient 9999 9999 0 5 381 C44 935 PID display gain coefficient 9999 9999 100 1136 Second PID display bias coefficient 9999 9999 0 1138 Second PID display gain coefficient 9999 9999 100 3 step monitor setting...

Page 255: ... setting Refer to page 5 532 Initial setting with the GOT1000 series Set Pr 999 10 to configure the GOT initial setting Pr Name Initial value Pr 999 10 Pr 999 12 Refer to page 79 Operation mode selection 0 1 1 5 119 118 PU communication speed 192 192 1152 5 467 119 PU communication stop bit length 1 10 0 120 PU communication parity check 2 1 1 121 Number of PU communication retries 1 9999 9999 122...

Page 256: ...tting with the GOT1000 series Set Pr 999 10 to configure the GOT initial setting Pr Name Initial value Pr 999 11 Pr 999 13 Refer to page 79 Operation mode selection 0 0 1 5 119 332 RS 485 communication speed 96 192 1152 5 467 333 RS 485 communication stop bit length 1 10 0 334 RS 485 communication parity check selection 2 1 1 335 RS 485 communication retry count 1 9999 9999 336 RS 485 communicatio...

Page 257: ...ency for maximum input pulse 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 140 390 setting reference frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 506 505 Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 196 584 Auxiliary motor 1 starting frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 392 585 Auxiliary motor 2 starting frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 586 Auxiliary motor 3 starting frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz C14 918 Terminal 1 g...

Page 258: ...red parameters set Pr 172 9999 NOTES When a plug in option is installed on the inverter the option parameters can also be read Every parameter can be read regardless of the Pr 160 setting when reading parameters via a com munication option When reading the parameters using the RS 485 terminals all parameters can be read regardless of the Pr 160 setting by setting Pr 550 NET mode operation command ...

Page 259: ...ess to display Parameter registration Turn until Pr 3 appears Press to register the parameter and flicker alternately To continue adding parameters repeat steps and Tab 5 39 When registering Pr 3 to user group Operation Power ON Make sure the motor is stopped Changing the operation mode Press to choose the PU operation mode PU indicator is lit Parameter setting mode Press to select the parameter s...

Page 260: ...er than 9999 Parameters referred to Pr 15 Jog frequency page 5 144 Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time page 5 144 Pr 77 Parameter write selection page 5 72 Pr 296 Password lock level page 5 76 Pr 297 Password lock unlock page 5 76 Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection page 5 130 Pr 551 PU mode operation command source selection page 5 130 Pr 991 PU contrast adjustment page 5 67 P...

Page 261: ...0 01800 75K Soft PWM control Pr 240 Soft PWM control is a control method that changes the motor noise from a metallic sound into an inoffensive complex tone Setting Pr 240 1 will enable the Soft PWM control To enable the Soft PWM control for the FR F820 02330 55K or lower and FR F840 01160 55K or lower set Pr 72 to 5 kHz or less To enable it for the FR F820 03160 75K or higher and FR F840 01800 75...

Page 262: ...gher inverter rated current reduces the carrier frequency automatically 0 0 SLD Continuous operation with the 85 or higher inverter rated current reduces the carrier frequency automatically 1 LD Without carrier frequency automatic reduction Perform continuous operation with the carrier frequency set to 2 kHz or lower or with less than 85 of the inverter rated current Tab 5 42 Parameter settings fo...

Page 263: ...cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit have reached the life alarm output level Read only 256 E701 Inrush current limit circuit life display 100 0 to 100 Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush current limit circuit Read only 257 E702 Control circuit capacitor life display 100 0 to 100 Displays the deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor Read only 258 E703 Main circuit ...

Page 264: ...ation degree of the control circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr 257 In the operating status the control circuit capacitor life is calculated from the energization time and temperature and is counted down from 100 As soon as the control circuit capacitor life falls below 10 Pr 255 bit 0 is turned ON and also a warning is output to the Y90 signal Pr 255 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 Decimal Binary 15 1111 14...

Page 265: ...asurement starts when the power supply is switched OFF 2 During measurement Only displayed and cannot be set 3 Measurement complete 8 Forced end 9 Measurement error Tab 5 44 Parameter 259 NOTES When the main circuit capacitor life is measured under the following conditions forced end Pr 259 8 or measurement error Pr 259 9 may occur or the status may remain in meas urement start Pr 259 1 To perform...

Page 266: ...nal etc right after powering OFF to prevent an electric shock Capacity Warning level FR F820 00250 5 5K or lower FR F820 03160 75K or higher FR F840 00126 5 5K or lower Less than 50 of the rated rotations per minute FR F820 00340 7 5K to FR F820 02330 55K FR F840 00170 7 5K to FR F840 03610 160K Less than 70 of the rated rotations per minute FR F840 04320 185K or higher FR F842 07700 355K or highe...

Page 267: ...nction selection Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 503 E710 Maintenance timer 1 0 0 1 to 9998 Displays the inverter s cumulative energization time in increments of 100 h read only Writing the setting of 0 clears the cumulative energization time while Pr 503 1 to 9998 Writing is disabled when Pr 503 0 504 E711 Maintenance timer 1 warning output set time 9999 0 to 9998 Set the time unt...

Page 268: ...they are displayed in the priority of MT1 MT2 MT3 The cumulative energization time is counted every hour Energization time of less than 1 h is not counted Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Parameters referred to Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal funct...

Page 269: ...the FR F820 02330 55K or lower and FR F840 01160 55K or lower Initial value for the FR F820 03160 75K or higher and FR F840 01800 75K and higher I002551E Fig 5 12 Monitoring the maintenance timer and current average value Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 555 E720 Current average time 1 s 0 1 to 1 s Set the time for calculating the average current during start pulse output 1 s 556 E7...

Page 270: ...t average value is less than 10 of the set ting value in Pr 557 the output time is 0 5 s and when it is more than 180 the output time is 9 s For example when Pr 557 10 A and the output current average value is 15 A 15 A 10 A 5 s 7 5 s thus the current average value monitor signal is Low output in 7 5 s intervals I001265E Fig 5 13 Output of the pulse signal Y93 Output current average value 5 s Outp...

Page 271: ...tput current value inverter output current monitor is 0 A at the completion of the 1 cycle signal output no signal is output until the next constant speed state Under the following conditions the Y93 signal is output with Low output in 20 s intervals no data output When acceleration or deceleration is operating at the completion of the 1 cycle signal output When automatic restart after instantaneo...

Page 272: ...00 Parameters referred to Pr 57 Restart coasting time page 5 415 page 5 423 Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection page 5 231 Pr 503 Maintenance timer 1 page 5 95 Pr 686 Maintenance timer 2 page 5 95 Pr 688 Maintenance timer 3 page 5 95 ...

Page 273: ...F000 to P F003 P F010 P F011 P F020 to P F022 P F070 P F071 Pr 7 Pr 8 Pr 16 Pr 20 Pr 21 Pr 44 Pr 45 Pr 147 Pr 611 Pr 791 Pr 792 5 102 To set the acceleration deceleration pattern suitable for application Acceleration deceleration pattern and backlash measures P F100 P F200 to P F203 Pr 29 Pr 140 to Pr 143 5 107 To command smooth speed transition with terminals Remote setting function P F101 Pr 59 ...

Page 274: ...p status to Pr 20 Refer to page 5 144 611 F003 Acceleration time at a restart 9999 0 to 3600 s 9999 Set the acceleration time for restart from stop status to Pr 20 When 9999 is set standard acceleration time like Pr 7 is applied as the acceleration time at restart Refer to page 5 415 page 5 423 7 F010 Acceleration time 5 s 0 to 3600 s Set the motor acceleration time from stop status to Pr 20 15 s ...

Page 275: ...ormed to find the setting value for Pr 7 when increas ing the output frequency to the maximum frequency of 50 Hz in 10 s with Pr 20 60 Hz initial value and Pr 13 0 5 Hz Pr 7 60 Hz 10 s 50 Hz 0 5 Hz 12 1 s Fig 5 17 Acceleration deceleration time I002553E JOG Pr 16 Acceleration and deceleration time Pr 7 Pr 8 Second acceleration and deceleration time Pr 44 Pr 45 Output frequency Pr 147 or Pr 147 999...

Page 276: ...tting value for Pr 8 when increasing the output frequency to the maximum frequency of 50 Hz in 10 s with Pr 20 120 Hz and Pr 10 3 Hz Pr 8 120 Hz 10 s 50 Hz 3 Hz 25 5 s NOTES If the acceleration deceleration time is set the actual motor acceleration deceleration time can not be made shorter than the shortest acceleration deceleration time determined by the mechan ical system J moment of inertia and...

Page 277: ...itches to the Pr 44 Pr 45 when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the Pr 10 or Pr 13 setting Switching frequency for each control method Pr 147 setting Acceleration deceleration time Description 9999 initial value Pr 7 Pr 8 Acceleration deceleration time is not automatically changed 0 00 Hz Pr 44 Pr 45 Second acceleration deceleration time is applied from the start 0 01 Hz Pr 147 set frequenc...

Page 278: ...the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid Refer to page 5 291 RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to another terminal I002555E Fig 5 19 Setting the acceleration deceleration time in the low speed range NOTES Set Pr 791 higher than Pr 7 and Pr 7...

Page 279: ...motor and inverter Linear acceleration deceleration has a uniform frequency time slope Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 29 F100 Acceleration deceleration pattern selection 0 0 Linear acceleration deceleration 1 S pattern acceleration deceleration A 2 S pattern acceleration deceleration B 3 Backlash measures 6 Variable torque acceleration deceleration 140 F200 Backlash acceleration s...

Page 280: ...ase frequency fb or more Acceleration deceleration time calculation method when the set frequency is equal to or higher than the base frequency Acceleration time t 4 9 T fb f 5 9 T T acceleration deceleration time s f set frequency Hz fb base frequency rated motor frequency Reference 0 Hz to set frequency of acceleration deceleration time when Pr 3 60 Hz Fig 5 21 Characteristic for parameter 29 1 ...

Page 281: ...dthisgapdisablesamechanicalsystemfrom following motor rotation More specifically a motor shaft develops excessive torque when the direction of rotation changes or when constant speed operation shifts to deceleration resulting in a sudden motor current increase or regenerative status To avoid backlash acceleration deceleration is temporarily stopped Set the acceleration decel eration stopping frequ...

Page 282: ... setting is prioritized and the inverter operates as Pr 14 0 constant torque load For the variable torque acceleration deceleration time setting set the time period to reach Pr 3 Base frequency Not the time period to reach Pr 20 Acceleration deceleration reference fre quency The variable torque acceleration deceleration is disabled during PM motor control Linear accel eration deceleration is perfo...

Page 283: ...ote setting When Pr 59 0 remote setting function valid the functions of the RH RM and RL signals are changed to acceleration RH deceleration RM and clear RL Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description RH RM RL signal function Frequency setting storage function Deceleration to the frequency lower than the set frequency 59 F101 Restart cushion time 0 0 Multi speed setting Disabled 1 Remote setti...

Page 284: ...operation mode frequency I002563E Fig 5 26 Example of the remote setting function I002564E Fig 5 27 Acceleration deceleration operation NOTE While the RT signal is OFF Pr 44 Second acceleration deceleration time and Pr 45 Second deceleration time are used as the set frequency accelerating decelerating time at turn ON of the acceleration deceleration signal If the Pr 7 and Pr 8 settings are longer ...

Page 285: ...e latest frequency is different from the previous one when comparing the two This cannot be written with RL signals Clearing the settings WhenPr 59 1 2 11 12 andtheclearsignal RL isturnedON theremotely setfrequencyiscleared When Pr 59 3 13 and the STF STR signal is turned OFF the remotely set frequency is cleared NOTE When switching the start signal from ON to OFF or changing frequency by the RH o...

Page 286: ...both the RH and RM signals E CAUTION When using the remote setting function set the maximum frequency again according to the machine Parameters referred to Pr 1 Maximum frequency page 5 176 Pr 18 High speed maximum frequency page 5 176 Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 102 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 102 Pr 44 Second acceleration deceleration time page 5 102 Pr 45 Second deceleration time page 5 102...

Page 287: ...rting frequency This function performs initial excitation to smooth the motor drive at a start Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 13 F102 Starting frequency 0 5 Hz 0 to 60 Hz Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is turned ON 571 F103 Holding time at a start 9999 0 to 10 s Set the holding time of Pr 13 9999 The holding function at a start is invalid Fig 5 28 Starting fr...

Page 288: ...ed at that point At switching between forward rotation and reverse rotation the starting frequency is valid but the start time hold function is invalid E CAUTION Note that when Pr 13 is set to any value equal to or lower than the setting of Pr 2 Minimum frequency simply turning ON the start signal will run the motor at the frequency set in Pr 2 even if the command frequency is not input Parameters...

Page 289: ...mum rotations per minute 0 to 60 Hz Set the frequency where the motor starts running Fig 5 30 Starting frequency parameter I002568E NOTES Under induction motor control under V F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control the output starts at the frequency set in Pr 13 Under PM motor control the output always starts at 0 01 Hz The inverter output does not start when the frequency setting sig...

Page 290: ... operation Operation and speed command sources during communication operation command source selection P D010 to P D013 Pr 338 Pr 339 Pr 550 Pr 551 5 130 To prevent motor from rotating reversely Reverse rotation prevention selection P D020 Pr 78 5 139 To set the frequency by pulse train input Pulse train input P D100 P D101 P D110 P D111 Pr 291 Pr 384 to Pr 386 5 140 To perform JOG operation JOG o...

Page 291: ...ration mode NET operation mode 5 122 Operation mode Frequency command Start command 1 PU operation mode fixed Operation panel or parameter unit FWD or REV key on operation panel or parameter unit PU operation mode 5 123 2 External operation mode fixed The operation can be performed by switching between the External and NET operation modes External signal input terminal 2 and 4 JOG multi speed sele...

Page 292: ...operation mode can be selected from the operation panel or with the communication instruction code I002570E Fig 5 31 Operation modes of the inverter NOTES There are two settings of 3 and 4 with PU External combined operation The startup method differs according to the setting value In the initial setting the stop function PU stop selection by the operation panel or the parameter unit is effective ...

Page 293: ...tting Frequency setting terminal ON Start command STF STR ON PU digital setting STF forward rotation STR reverse rotation Refer to page 5 293 Pr 79 3 External PU combined operation 1 Frequency setting DU digital setting Start command STF STR ON Communication RS 485 terminals STF forward rotation STR reverse rotation Refer to page 5 293 RS 485 terminals Refer to page 5 455 Pr 338 1 Pr 340 1 2 Frequ...

Page 294: ... combined operation 2 Frequency setting Frequency setting terminal ON Start command FWD REV key ON PU digital setting Pr 79 1 PU operation mode fixed Frequency setting Digital setting Start command FWD REV key ON Communication RS 485 terminals communication option N A Communication RS 485 terminals External terminal 2 and 4 JOG multi speed etc RS 485 terminals Refer to page 5 455 Terminal 2 and 4 ...

Page 295: ...e logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function PU External combined operation mode 1 Pr 79 3 Select the PU External combined operation mode 1 when applying a frequency command from the operation panel or the parameter unit and inputting a start command with the external start switches Set 3 in Pr 79 The mode cannot be changed to other operation modes W...

Page 296: ...ion is continued For the setting frequency the setting of the potentiometer frequency command is continued Note however that the setting disappears when the power is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset External operation NET operation The switchover command to the Network operation mode is transmitted via communication As the direction of rotation the direction that was active by External ope...

Page 297: ...on of the X12 signal Operating status X12 MRS signal Operation mode Operating status Switching to PU or NET operation mode Operation mode Status PU NET during a stop ON OFF External If frequency and start commands are input from external source the inverter runs by those commands Not available Running ON OFF Not available External during a stop OFF ON External during a stop Available ON OFF Not av...

Page 298: ...ignal X65 to a terminal When the X65 signal is ON the PU operation mode is selected When the X65 signal is OFF the Network operation mode is selected Pr 79 setting X16 signal status and operation mode Remarks ON External OFF PU 0 initial value External operation mode PU operation mode Switching among the External PU and NET operation modes is enabled 1 PU operation mode PU operation mode fixed 2 E...

Page 299: ...nal Pr 340 setting Pr 79 setting X65 signal state Remarks ON PU OFF NET 10 12 0 initial value PUoperationmode NET operation mode 1 PU operation mode PU operation mode fixed 2 NET operation mode NET operation mode fixed 3 4 External PU combined operation mode External PU combined operation mode fixed 6 PUoperationmode NET operation mode Switching between operation modes is enabled while running 7 X...

Page 300: ...r 75 Reset selection disconnected PU detection PU stop selection page 5 63 Pr 161 Frequency setting key lock operation selection page 5 69 Pr 178 to Pr 182 input terminal function selection page 5 285 Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection page 5 231 Pr 340 Communication startup mode selection page 5 128 Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection page 5 130 Pr Name Initial val...

Page 301: ...the External and NET operation modes is enabled Switching to PU operation mode is disabled 3 4 External PU combined operation mode Operation mode switching is disabled 6 External operation mode Switching among the External PU and NET operation mode is enabled while running 7 X12 MRS signal ONExternal operation mode Switching among the External PU and NET operation modes is enabled X12 MRS signal O...

Page 302: ... D012 NET mode operation command source selection 9999 0 The communication option is the command source when in the NET operation mode 1 The RS 485 terminals are the command source when in the NET operation mode FR F800 E For manufacturer setting Do not set 5 FR F800 E The Ethernet connector is the command source when in the NET operation mode 9999 Communication option is recognized automatically ...

Page 303: ...e in the PU operation mode Set Pr 551 1 to use communication connected to the RS 485 terminals to write parameters or execute start and frequency commands in the PU operation mode Set Pr 551 3 or 9999 to use the USB connector For FR F800 E In the PU operation mode set Pr 551 5 to write parameters or input the start and frequency commands via the Ethernet connector NOTE In the initial setting 9999 ...

Page 304: ...ration mode disabled 2 PU operation mode NET operation mode 3 PU operation mode NET operation mode 9999 initial value PU operation mode PU operation mode NET operation mode 5 2 PU operation mode NET operation mode 3 PU operation mode NET operation mode 5 PU operation mode Switching to NET opera tion mode disabled 9999 initial value PU operation mode PU operation mode NET operation mode 9999 initia...

Page 305: ...ation when communica tion option is used Control by RS 485 com munication via PU connector 2 PU connector 9999 automatic recognition without USB connection Operation start command Operation stop command Δ Δ Δ Running frequency Monitor Parameter writing Parameter read Inverter reset Other than the above Operation start command Operation stop command Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ Running frequency Monitor Parameter wri...

Page 306: ...elected Operation command start stop Running frequency Monitor Parameter writing Parameter read Inverter reset Communica tion option via communica tion Operation command start stop Running frequency Monitor Parameter writing Parameter read Inverter reset External terminal at the control circuit Inverter reset Operation command start stop Frequency setting Valid Invalid Δ Partially valid Not availa...

Page 307: ...d the operating condition Refer to page 5 72 Some parameters are write enabled independently of the operation mode and command source presence absence Writing is also enabled when Pr 77 2 Refer to page 5 72 Parameter clear is disabled When Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection 1 RS 485 terminals enabled or Pr 550 9999 with no communication option connected FR F800 E When Pr 550 NET mo...

Page 308: ...ly FR F800 E Not available Fault record Conditions Pr 551 setting Operation in each operation mode at error occurrences PU operation External operation External PU combined operation mode 1 Pr 79 3 External PU combined operation mode 2 Pr 79 4 NET operation when RS 485 terminals areused NET operation when the Ethernet connector is used NET operation when communica tion option is used Inverter faul...

Page 309: ...ternal NET External 2 RH High speed operation command remote setting acceleration NET External NET External 3 RT Second function selection stop on contact selection 1 NET External Pr 270 1 3 11 or 13 stop on contact 4 AU Terminal 4 input selection Combined Combined 5 JOG Jog operation selection External 6 CS No function External 7 OH External thermal relay input External 8 REX 15 speed selection N...

Page 310: ...cancel NET External 72 X72 PID P control switchover NET External NET External 73 X73 Second PID P control switchover NET External NET External 77 X77 Pre charge end command NET External NET External 78 X78 Second pre charge end command NET External NET External 79 X79 Second PID forward reverse action switchover NET External NET External 80 X80 Second PID control valid terminal NET External NET Ex...

Page 311: ...he parameter unit the start signals STF STR signals via external terminals and the forward and reverse rotation commands through communication X67 signal state Start command source Speed command source Signal not assigned According to Pr 338 According to Pr 339 ON OFF Commands from external terminals are only valid Tab 5 62 Switching of command source by the signal X67 NOTES The ON OFF state of th...

Page 312: ...ut 1 Pulse train input FM output 10 JOG signal High speed pulse train output 50 duty 11 Pulse train input High speed pulse train output 50 duty 20 JOG signal High speed pulse train output ON width fixed 21 Pulse train input High speed pulse train output ON width fixed 100 Pulse train input High speed pulse train output ON width fixed Output of pulse train input as is 384 D101 Input pulse division ...

Page 313: ...f the wiring changes considerably according to how the cable is laid thus the above wiring lengths are not guaranteed values When using a pull up down resistance checkthepermissibleloadoftheresistorandthepermissibleloadcurrentoftheoutput transistor and use within the permissible range Connection with a complementary output system pulse generator I002573E_G Fig 5 37 Pulse train input Wiring length ...

Page 314: ...hen pulse train input is zero and at 30 Hz when pulse train is 4000 pulses sec set the inverter as follows Pr 384 10 maximum number of input pulses 4000 pulses s Pr 385 0 Hz Pr 386 30 Hz pulse train limit value 33 Hz Item Specification Supported pulse method Open collector output Complementary output 24 V power supply voltage HIGH input level 20 V or more voltage between JOG and SD LOW input level...

Page 315: ...nverters that receive pulse train since the maximum pulse train output is 50k pulses s The maximum number of input pulses should be 50k pulses s When performing synchronized operation wire according to the following procedure This is to prevent contact input of 24 V from being applied to the terminal FM Set pulse train output setting other than 0 1 to Pr 291 on the master side inverter Turn the in...

Page 316: ...ted and 0 is set to Pr 160 User group read selection Refer to page 5 85 The Pr 20 initial value is set to 60 Hz for the FM type and to 50 Hz for the CA type Item Specification Output pulse format Pulse width fixed 10 μs Pulse rate 0 to 50 kpps Pulse propagation delay 1 to 2 μs 1 unit Tab 5 66 Speed synchronized operation specification Parameters referred to Pr 291 Pulse train output page 5 211 Pr ...

Page 317: ...ignal can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal During JOG operation the second acceleration deceleration cannot be selected with the RT sig nal Other second functions are enabled Refer to page 5 291 When Pr 79 Operation ...

Page 318: ...n RM is ON 6 D303 Multi speed setting low speed 10 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Sets the frequency when RL is ON 24 D304 Multi speed setting speed 4 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 Frequency from 4th speed to 15th speed can be set according to the combination of the RH RM RL and REX signals 9999 Not selected 25 D305 Multi speed setting speed 5 26 D306 Multi speed setting speed 6 27 D307 Multi speed setting speed 7 232 D3...

Page 319: ...tting when two or more of multi speed settings are simultaneously selected prior ity is given to the set frequency of the lower signal For example when RH and RM signals turn ON RM signal Pr 5 has a higher priority The RH RM and RL signals are assigned to the terminals RH RM and RL in the initial status Set 0 RL 1 RM and 2 RH in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign t...

Page 320: ...iority among them When Pr 59 Remote function selection 0 the multi speed setting is invalid since the RH RM and RL signals are for remote setting When performing analog input compensation set Pr 28 Multi speed input compensation selec tion to 1 Select the terminals terminals 1 2 to use for compensation input voltage 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V at Pr 73 Analog input selection When using terminal 1 for compe...

Page 321: ...n I O phase loss protection selection P H200 P H201 Pr 251 Pr 872 5 163 To restart using the retry function when the protective function is activated Retry operation P H300 to P H303 Pr 65 Pr 67 to Pr 69 5 164 To operate without activating protective functions in case of emergency Emergency drive P H320 to P H324 Pr 514 Pr 515 Pr 23 Pr 524 Pr 1013 5 167 To set the upper and lower limits of the out...

Page 322: ... free thermal reduction frequency 3 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 607 H006 Motor permissible load level 150 110 to 150 Set the permissible load according to the motor characteristics 51 H010 Second electronic thermal O L relay 9999 0 to 500 A Enabled when the RT signal is ON Set the rated motor current 0 to 3600 A 9999 Second electronic thermal O L relay invalid 692 H011 Second free thermal reduction freq...

Page 323: ...the inverter rated current It is not the percentage to the rated motor current When the electronic thermal O L relay of the Mitsubishi constant torque motor is set the charac teristic curve is as shown in this diagram at 6 Hz or higher For selection of the operation characteristic refer to page 5 297 Transistor protection is activated depending on the temperature of the heatsink The protection may...

Page 324: ...icated on the motor rating plate is affected by the line to line leak age current Refer to page 3 1 The cooling effect of the motor drops during low speed opera tion Use a thermal protector or a motor with built in thermistor The protective characteristic of the electronic thermal O L relay is degraded when there is a large difference in capacity between the inverter and motor and when the set val...

Page 325: ... THE4 NOTES The internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset to the initial value by the inverter s power reset and reset signal input Avoid unnecessary reset and power OFF When using a PM motor other than MM EFS MM THE4 set the free thermal parameters Pr 600 to Pr 604 in accordance with the motor characteristic The transistor protection thermal O L relay is ac...

Page 326: ...o 2 Motor No 1 motor No 2 motor 9999 0 9999 0 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 Δ 9999 Other than 0 9999 0 Δ 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 Δ Δ Other than 9999 0 9999 0 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 Δ Other than 9999 Other than 0 9999 Δ Δ 0 Δ 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 Δ Δ Values are accumulated by using the output current Δ Values are accumulated by assuming the output current is 0 A cooling processing Electronic thermal ...

Page 327: ...verter output is not shut off with the warning signal THP For the terminal used for THP signal output set 8 positive logic or 108 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function I003020E Fig 5 48 Example of motor permissible load setting when Pr 9 100 of the inverter rating I001138E Fig 5 49 Prealarm signal output NOTE Changing the terminal assig...

Page 328: ...relay function is activated the external thermal operation E OHT shuts off the inverter output For the terminal used for the OH signal input set 7 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the function Fig 5 50 Connection of an external thermal relay I002582E_G NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the...

Page 329: ...tection is delayed or too cold too much protection When the PTC thermistor protection is enabled Pr 561 9999 the resistance value for the PTC thermistor can be displayed on the operation panel or via RS 485 communication Refer to page 5 198 When the PTC thermistor protection level setting is used use Pr 1016 PTC thermistor protection detection time to set the time from when the resistance of the P...

Page 330: ...so disabled Use Pr 133 PID action set point to set the set point for the PID function To input power to the PTC thermistor power supply always use the terminal 10 Do not use any other terminals or an external power supply Otherwise the PTC thermistor protection E PTC does not operate properly When E PTC is activated the alarm display External protection AU terminal may appear on the parameter unit...

Page 331: ... setting I002586E I002833E Fig 5 55 Setting examples Fig 5 56 Overheat protection setting example I002587E NOTE Make sure to set the parameters according to the motor temperature characteristic used Parameters referred to Pr 71 Applied motor page 5 297 Pr 72 PWM frequency selection page 5 88 Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection page 5 285 Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function sel...

Page 332: ...ng fan operation command signal Y206 signal can be output when the inverter cooling fan meets the conditions for running The function can be used when the fan installed on the enclosure is synchronized with the inverter cooling fan Y206 signal indicates the operating command condition of the inverter cooling fan depending on the power supply ON OFF or the Pr 244 settings The signal does not indica...

Page 333: ...range Description 249 H101 Earth ground fault detection at start 0 0 Without the earth ground fault detection at start 1 With the earth ground fault detection at start NOTES Because of the detection performed at start the output is delayed by approximately 20 ms at every start Use Pr 249 to enable disable ground fault detection at operation start Ground faults are detected always during operation ...

Page 334: ...ive function gener ated by the fault is not saved in the faults history Perform inverter reset to cancel the protective function FortheselectableparameterbyPr 997andthecorrespondingprotectivefunctions refertopage6 9 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 997 H103 Fault initiation 9999 16 to 253 The setting range is same with the one for fault data codes of the inverter which can be read t...

Page 335: ...r Name Initial value Setting range Description 251 H200 Output phase loss protection selection 1 0 Without output phase loss protection 1 With output phase loss protection 872 H201 Input phase loss protection selection 0 0 Without input phase loss protection 1 With input phase loss protection NOTES When several motors are connected output phase loss cannot be detected even if the wiring to one mot...

Page 336: ...erter retries Refer to the retry failure example Use Pr 68 to set the waiting time from a protective function activation to a retry in the range of 0 1 to 600 s During retry operation the during retry Y64 signal is ON For the Y64 signal set 64 positive logic or 164 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function Pr Name Initial value Setting rang...

Page 337: ...ult not in dicated For the fault details refer to page 6 9 indicates the faults selected for retry I002589E Fig 5 57 Retry success and retry failure example Tab 5 69 Errors selected for retry 0 Y64 0 Y64 Retry success Pr 68 x 4 Pr 68 If it is below 3 1s 3 1s is set Inverter output frequency Retry start Fault occurrence Retry success count Success count 1 Time Inverter output frequency Retry succes...

Page 338: ...retry function does not clear the accumulated data of the electronic thermal O L relay This is different from power supply reset or reset by RES signal When the parameter storage device fault E PE is occurring and reading of the retry function related parameters is not possible retry cannot operated Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection may affe...

Page 339: ...ed frequency mode is selected in Pr 523 0 to 100 Set the PID set point in the PID control mode of the emergency drive when the PID control mode is selected in Pr 523 9999 Emergency drive disabled 515 H322 Emergency drive dedicated retry count 1 1 to 200 Set the retry count during emergency drive operation 9999 Without retry count excess no restriction on the number of retries 1013 H323 Running spe...

Page 340: ...minal function selection TheappliedterminalsdifferbythesettingsofPr 190toPr 196 outputterminalfunctionselection I003022E_G Fig 5 58 Connection diagram of emergency drive Output terminal capacity Output terminal permissible load Inverter open collector output RUN SU IPF OL FU 24 V DC 0 1 A Inverter relay output A1 C1 B1 C1 A2 B2 B2 C2 Relay output option FR A8AR 230 V AC 0 3 A 30 V DC 0 3 A Tab 5 7...

Page 341: ... operation ED appears on the operation panel during emergency drive operation ALM3 signal turns ON when a fault occurs during emergency drive operation I003023E Fig 5 59 Emergency drive function when switchover to the commercial power supply is disabled RES X84 STF ALM3 Y65 ALM Retry waiting time Pr 514 Emergency drive continued Frequency Time Retry in case of critical faults Continuous operation ...

Page 342: ... emergency drive is enabled I003024E Fig 5 60 Emergency drive function when switchover to the commercial power supply is enabled STF X84 CS MC3 MC2 MC3 MC2 Y65 Emergency drive continued Frequency ON 3 s ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON MC delay Coasting Time Motor rotations per minute Normal operation Emergency drive commercial power supply operation Emergency drive in operation Pr 136 Power supply ...

Page 343: ...ed occurs or the retry count is exceeded 3 Retry commercial mode Retry operation at a critical fault occurrence Electronic bypass at the occurrence of a fault for which retry is not permitted The operation is switched over to the commercial power supply operation when a critical fault for which retry is not permitted occurs or the retry count is exceeded While Pr 515 9999 the operation is switched...

Page 344: ...on The operation is immediately switched over to the com mercial power supply operation during output shutoff due to a critical fault occurrence If the parameter for electronic bypass is not set while the commercial mode is set Pr 523 3 4 the operation is not switched over to the commercial power supply operation even when a condition for switchover is satisfied and the output is shut off Forthete...

Page 345: ...operation the operation is performed not under PID control but with the fixed frequency Use Pr 1013 Running speed after emergency drive retry reset to set the fixed frequency NOTE During electronic bypass operation while the electronic bypass sequence is enabled Pr 135 1 the emergency drive function is not available Item PID control action Set point measured value input setting Deviation input set...

Page 346: ... SAF Retry E OV3 Retry E OP3 Disabled E PBT Retry E THT Retry E 16 Disabled E OS Disabled E THM Retry E 17 Disabled E LCI Disabled E FIN Retry E 18 Disabled E PCH Disabled E IPF Disabled E 19 Disabled E PID Disabled E UVT Disabled E 20 Disabled E 1 Retry E ILF Disabled E PE Output shutoff E 2 Retry E OLT Retry E PUE Disabled E 3 Retry E SOT Retry E RET Output shutoff E 5 Retry E LUP Disabled E PE2...

Page 347: ... allowed due to output shutoff 2 Electronic bypass is started during emergency drive during acceleration deceleration to the switchover frequency 3 During electronic bypass during emergency drive waiting during the interlock time 4 During commercial power supply operation during emergency drive Tab 5 78 Emergency drive status monitor description NOTES When the retry Pr 523 2 3 is selected it is re...

Page 348: ...y Pr 2 Set Pr 2 Minimum frequency to the lower limit of the output frequency If the set frequency is Pr 2 or less the output frequency is clamped at Pr 2 will not fall below Pr 2 E CAUTION When the emergency drive operation is performed the operation is continued or the retry is repeated even when a fault occurs which may damage or burn the inverter and motor Before restartingthenormaloperationaft...

Page 349: ...eds Pr 1 Pr 18 Maximum frequency is set for the 3 point fre quency jump the maximum frequency setting is the set frequency If the set frequency is less than the jump frequency Pr 2 Minimum frequency the jump frequency is the set frequency The set frequency can be equal to or lower than the frequency lower limit E CAUTION NotethatwhenPr 2issettoanyvalueequaltoorhigherthanPr 13 Startingfrequency sim...

Page 350: ...jump 1A 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 1A to 1B 2A to 2B 3A to 3B are frequency jumps 3 point jump 9999 Function disabled 32 H421 Frequency jump 1B 33 H422 Frequency jump 2A 34 H423 Frequency jump 2B 35 H424 Frequency jump 3A 36 H425 Frequency jump 3B 552 H429 Frequency jump range 9999 0 to3 0 Hz Set the jump range for the frequency jumps 6 point jump 9999 3 point jump Fig 5 62 Definition of the jump areas...

Page 351: ...able error Er1 will occur Setting Pr 552 0 disables frequency jumps If a jump frequency that exceeds Pr 1 Pr 18 Maximum frequency is set for the 3 point jump the maximum frequency setting is the set frequency If the set frequency is less than the jump fre quency Pr 2 Minimum frequency the jump frequency is the set frequency The set frequency can be equal to or lower than the frequency lower limit ...

Page 352: ...ll prevention operation level 120 110 0 Second stall prevention operation disabled 0 1 to 400 The stall prevention operation level can be changed using the RT signal 49 H601 Second stall prevention operation frequency 0Hz 0 Second stall prevention operation disabled 0 01 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the Pr 48 stall prevention operation will start 9999 Pr 48 is enabled when RT signal is ON ...

Page 353: ...t the OL signal output start time when stall prevention is activated 9999 No OL signal output 858 T040 Terminal 4 function assignment 0 0 4 9999 When set 4 the stall prevention level can be changed with the signal to the terminal 4 868 T010 Terminal 1 function assignment 0 0 4 9999 When set 4 the stall prevention level can be changed with the signal to the terminal 1 874 H730 OLT level setting 120...

Page 354: ...sabled Stall prevention operation selection enabled disabled OL signal output operation continued operation stopped Pr 156 setting Fast response current limit enabled disabled Stall prevention operation selection enabled disabled OL signal output operation continued operation stopped Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration 0 initial value 16 1 17 2 18 3 19...

Page 355: ...ing Description 0 initial value Output immediately 0 1 to 25 Output after the set time s 9999 Not output Tab 5 80 Setting of parameter 157 Fig 5 65 Output of the OL signal I002515E NOTES OL signal is assigned to the terminal OL in the initial status The OL signal can be assigned to other terminals by setting 3 positive logic or 103 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function...

Page 356: ...ctionstarting frequency to 60 Hz and Pr 23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed to 100 Calculation formula for stall prevention operation level When Pr 23 9999 initial value the stall prevention operation level is constant at the Pr 22 level up to 590 Hz Fig 5 66 Stall prevention operation level I002597E Fig 5 67 Stall prevention operation level when Pr 22 120 Pr 23...

Page 357: ...9 The second stall prevention function operates according to the RT signal RT signal ON stall level Pr 48 RT signal OFF stall level Pr 22 Tab 5 81 Settings of parameter 49 I002599E Fig 5 68 Stall prevention operation level setting example NOTES When Pr 49 9999 level change according to frequency and Pr 48 0 the stall prevention function will be disabled at or lower than the frequency set in Pr 49 ...

Page 358: ...ons for terminal 1 auxiliary input override function PID control will be disabled When Pr 858 4 analog stall prevention PID control and speed commands using terminal 4 will not operate even if the AU signal turns ON When both of Pr 858 and Pr 868 are set to 4 stall prevention terminal 1 functions take priority and terminal 4 has no function I002600E Fig 5 69 Stall prevention operation level settin...

Page 359: ...t to trip at activation of stall prevention and stalling of the motor When a high load is applied and the stall prevention is activated the motor stalls At this time if the rotation speed is lower than 1 5 Hz and the output torque exceeds the level set in Pr 874 OLT level setting and such a state continues for 3 s stall prevention stop E OLT is activated and the inverter output is shut off NOTES T...

Page 360: ... too low Doing so will reduce the generated torque Be sure to perform a test run Stall prevention operation during acceleration may extend the acceleration time Stall prevention operation during constant speed operation may cause sudden speed changes Stall prevention operation during deceleration may extend the deceleration time Parameters referred to Pr 73 Analog input selection page 5 255 Pr 178...

Page 361: ...5 H525 Load characteristics load reference 5 9999 1486 H526 Load characteristics maximum frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the maximum frequency of the load characteristics fault detection range 1487 H527 Load characteristics minimum frequency 6 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the minimum frequency of the load characteristics fault detection range 1488 H531 Upper limit warning detection width 20 0 to 400 S...

Page 362: ...t is started read Pr 1480 to display the status of the measurement If 8 appears in the tens place the measurement has not properly completed I003026E Fig 5 71 Setting of the load characteristics and output frequency range NOTES Perform measurement under actual environment with the motor connected Set the Pr 1487 Load characteristics minimum frequency higher than the Pr 13 Starting fre quency Read ...

Page 363: ...rement from the stop state NOTES Even if the load measurement is not properly completed the load characteristics fault is detected based on the load characteristics found by the already completed portion of the measurement During the load characteristics measurement the load characteristics fault detection is not per formed During the load characteristics measurement linear acceleration decelerati...

Page 364: ... off When the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr 1491 Lower limit fault detection width the protective function E LDN is activated and the inverter output is shut off To prevent the repetitive on off operation of the signal due to load fluctuation near the detection range Pr 1492 Load status detection signal delay time load reference measurement waiting time can be used to set the...

Page 365: ...oad characteristics reference 3 f3 f5 f1 2 f1 35 Hz Pr 1483 30 Load characteristics reference 4 f4 f5 f1 3 4 f1 47 5 Hz Pr 1484 60 Load characteristics reference 5 f5 load characteristics maximum frequency Pr 1486 60 Hz Pr 1485 100 Tab 5 85 Setting example for load reference I003029E Fig 5 74 Reference value when the output frequency is 30 Hz NOTE When the load reference is not set for five points...

Page 366: ...ncy When Pr 702 9999 initial value the Pr 84 Rated motor frequency setting is applied as the maximum motor frequency Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 374 H800 Overspeed detection level 9999 0 to 590 Hz If the motor rotation speed exceeds the speed set in Pr 374 during PM motor control Overspeed occurrence E OS occurs and the inverter output is shut off 9999 During PM motor control E...

Page 367: ...0 C1 Pr 901 C8 Pr 930 to C11 Pr 931 5 218 To check the effects of energy saving Energy saving monitor P M023 P M100 P M200 to P M207 P M300 P M301 Pr 52 Pr 54 Pr 158 Pr 891 to Pr 899 5 60 To assign functions to the output terminals Output terminal function assignment P M400 to P M406 P M410 to P M412 P M431 Pr 190 to Pr 196 Pr 289 Pr 313 to Pr 315 5 231 To detect the output frequency Up to frequen...

Page 368: ...n setting the motor poles with Pr 81 Number of motor poles Pr 81 will not automatically change when Pr 144 is changed Example 1 Changing the initial value of Pr 81 to 2 or 12 will change Pr 144 from 4 to 2 Example 2 When setting Pr 81 2 while Pr 144 104 Pr 144 will change from 104 to 102 Display in motor speed Pr 37 Pr 505 To display in the machine speed set Pr 37 to the machine speed at the frequ...

Page 369: ...chine speed 1 machine speed 102 to 112 0 01 Hz 0 01 Hz 1 r min 0 01 Hz Tab 5 86 Setting range of parameter 37 and 144 NOTES The inverter s output frequency is displayed as synchronous speed under V F control The dis played value is actual motor speed motor slip When Advanced magnetic flux vector control or PM motor control is selected the actual motor speed estimated value by motor slip calcula ti...

Page 370: ...65535 kWh 563 M021 Energization time carrying over times 0 0 to 65535 Read only Displays the numbers of times that the cumulative energization time monitor exceeded 65535 h Read only 268 M022 Monitor decimal digits selection 9999 0 Displays as integral value 1 Displays in 0 1 increments 9999 No function 891 M023 Cumulativepowermonitor digit shifted times 9999 0 to 4 Set the number of times to shif...

Page 371: ...o page 5 196 Motor torque 0 1 7 H07 40207 Displays motor torque as a percentage 0 under V F control considering the rated torque as 100 Converter output voltage 0 1 V 8 H08 40208 Displays the DC bus voltage value 9 H09 40209 For manufacturer setting Do not set Electronic thermal O L relay load factor 0 1 10 H0A 40210 Displays the motor thermal cumulative value considering the thermal operation lev...

Page 372: ...tor 2 41 H29 40241 PLC function user monitor 3 42 H2A 40242 Station number RS 485 terminals 1 43 H2B 40243 Displays which station number 0 to 31 can currently be used for communication from the RS 485 terminal block Station number PU 1 44 H2C 40244 Displays which station number 0 to 31 can currently be used for communication from the PU connector Station number CC Link 1 45 H2D 40245 Displays whic...

Page 373: ...factor 0 1 62 H3E 40262 Displays the accumulated heat value of the inverter thermal O L relay The inverter overload trip E THT occurs at 100 PTC thermistor resistance 0 01 kΩ 64 H40 40264 Displays the PTC thermistor resistance when Pr 561 PTC thermistor protection level 9999 voltage monitor when Pr 561 9999 PID measured value 2 0 1 67 H43 40267 Displays PID measured value even if PID control opera...

Page 374: ... output level 0 1 86 H56 40286 Displays the value set in the Analog Output object ID 1 Terminal AM for BACnet communication A display without signs displays negative values as absolute values Remote output value 1 0 1 87 H57 40287 Displays the setting values of Pr 656 to Pr 659 analog remote output Refer to page 5 249 Remote output value 2 0 1 88 H58 40288 Remote output value 3 0 1 89 H59 40289 Re...

Page 375: ... when the option is not connected Option input terminal monitor 2 details FR A8AX input terminal status 1 denotes terminal ON 0 denotes terminal OFF denotes undetermined value All are OFF when the option is not connected Option output terminal monitor details FR A8AY A8AR output terminal status 1 denotes termi nal ON 1 denotes terminal OFF and denotes undetermined value All are OFF when the option...

Page 376: ...ency monitor and press SET key for 1 s For example when Pr 52 20 cumulative energization time the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as shown below Pr 774 sets the output frequency monitor Pr 775 sets the output current monitor and Pr 776 sets the monitor description to be displayed at the output voltage monitor position When Pr 774 to Pr 776 9999 initial value the Pr 52 setting value is ...

Page 377: ...henPr 992 100 thesetfrequencyisdisplayedduringstop andoutputfrequencyisdisplayed during running Displays the frequency that is output when the start command is ON The value considers the maximum minimum frequency and frequency jumps It is different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr 992 5 Pr 52 setting Status Output frequency Output current Output voltage Fault or alarm indication 0 Duri...

Page 378: ...al monitor Pr 52 57 Pr 52 setting Monitor description 55 Displays the I O terminal ON OFF state of the inverter 56 Displays input terminal ON OFF state of the digital input option FR A8AX 57 Displays output terminal ON OFF state of the digital output option FR A8AY or the relay output option FR A8AR Tab 5 90 I O terminal monitor I002605E_D Fig 5 78 Displaying the signal states of the I O terminals...

Page 379: ...operation time monitor Pr 171 Pr 563 Pr 564 Cumulative energization time monitor Pr 52 20 accumulates energization time from ship ment of the inverter every one hour On the actual operation time monitor Pr 52 23 the inverter running time is added up every hour Time is not added up during a stop If the number of monitor value exceeds 65535 it is added up from 0 Pr 563 allows the user to check how m...

Page 380: ... the monitor numbers in the first decimal place and smaller are rounded to display an integral value 1 increments The monitor value equal to or smaller than 0 99 is displayed as 0 1 When monitoring with the second decimal place 0 01 increments the 0 01 decimal place is dropped and the monitor displays the first decimal place 0 1 increments When monitoring with the first decimal place the display w...

Page 381: ...h minus sign 4 Output with a minus sign 5 Output with a minus sign Output with a minus sign 6 Output with a minus sign Output with a minus sign 7 Output with a minus sign Output with a minus sign Output with a minus sign Output without minus sign positive values only Tab 5 93 Minus sign display for the monitors Types of monitor Pr 1018 setting Types of monitor Pr 1018 setting 9999 0 9999 0 Output ...

Page 382: ...otor torque 17 Load meter 32 Torque command 33 Torque current command 1107 6 Running speed 1108 18 Motor excitation current Tab 5 95 Monitor filter Parameters referred to Pr 30 Regenerative function selection page 5 552 Pr 37 Motor speed display page 5 196 Pr 144 Speed setting switchover page 5 196 Pr 55 Frequency monitoring reference page 5 211 Pr 56 Current monitoring reference page 5 211 Pr 866...

Page 383: ...output to the terminal AM 55 M040 Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the full scale value when outputting the frequency monitor value to terminals FM CA and AM 56 M041 Current monitoring reference Inverter Rated current 0 to 500 A Set the full scale value when outputting the output current monitor value to terminals FM CA and AM 0 to 3600 A 866 M042 Torque monitoring refere...

Page 384: ... 800 V Frequency setting value 0 01 Hz 5 Pr 55 Running speed 1 r min 6 Value is Pr 55 converted by Pr 37 Pr 144 Refer to page 5 196 Refer to page 5 196 for the running speed monitor Motor torque 0 1 7 Pr 866 Converter output voltage 0 1 V 8 200 V class 400 V 400 V class 800 V 9 For manufacturer setting Do not set Electronic thermal O L relay load factor 0 1 10 Electronic thermal O L relay operatio...

Page 385: ... PID input pressure value 0 1 69 100 Displays the input pressure value of the PID input pressure control function PLC function analog output 0 1 70 100 Refer to page 5 439 for the PLC function BACnet terminal FM CA output level 0 1 85 100 The value set in the Analog Output object ID 0 Terminal FM CA for BACnet communication is output BACnet terminal AM output level 0 1 86 100 The value set in the ...

Page 386: ...erminal CA and 5 for example 60 Hz or 120 Hz Output current is proportional to the frequency The maximum output current is 20 mA DC For the calibration of terminal AM set the full scale value of the connected meter when output voltage of terminal FM is 10 V DC Set the frequency to be indicated as the full scale value on the meter 10 V DC voltmeter connected between terminal AM and 5 For example 60...

Page 387: ...connected between terminal AM and 5 Output voltage is proportional to the monitored value of output current The maximum output voltage is 10 V DC Torque monitor reference Pr 866 Set the full scale value when outputting the current monitor from terminal the FM CA or AM For the FM type inverters set the full scale value of the connected torque meter when the pulse speed of terminal FM is 1440 pulses...

Page 388: ...calibration Use a calibration resistor when the indicator frequency meter needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device because the indicator is located far from the inverter However the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full scale if the calibration resistor is connected In this case calibrate additionally with the operation panel or parameter unit In the initial setting 1 mA full scale ...

Page 389: ...nd OFF width are the same When Pr 291 20 21 100 the pulse ON width is output at a fixed width approx 10 μs At the 100 setting the same pulse train from the pulse train input terminal JOG will be outputted This is used when running at a synchronized speed with more than one inverter Refer to page 5 140 50 kpps when the monitor output value is 100 Fig 5 86 High speed pulse train output circuit examp...

Page 390: ...anged from high speed pulse train output to FM output voltage output since the Pr 291 setting value returns to the initial value of 0 Perform all parameter clear after removing the device connected to the terminal FM Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description C0 900 M310 FM CA terminal calibration Calibrates the scale of the meter connected to terminals FM and CA C1 901 M320 AM terminal calib...

Page 391: ...ter unit In the initial setting 1 mA full scale and 1440 pulses s terminal FM are used at 60 Hz Calibrate the terminal FM in the following procedure Connect an indicator frequency meter across terminals FM and SD of the inverter Note the polarity The terminal FM is positive When a calibration resistor has already been connected adjust the resistance to 0 or remove the resistor Refer to the monitor...

Page 392: ...terminal FM should be 200 m at maximum The initial value of the calibration parameter C0 Pr 900 is set to 1 mA full scale and 1440 pulses s terminal FM pulse train output at 60 Hz The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400 pulses s When connecting a frequency meter between terminals FM SD and monitoring the running fre quency it is necessary to change Pr 55 to the maximum frequency sinc...

Page 393: ...lected by Pr 54 FM CA terminal function selection will appear Pulse output via terminal FM If stopped press or to start the inverter operation To monitor the output frequency motor connection is not required When a monitor that does not require inverter operation is set in Pr 54 calibration is also possible during a stop status Scale adjustment Turn to move the meter needle to a desired position S...

Page 394: ... The terminal CA is positive Set the initial values of the calibration parameters C8 Pr 930 to C11 Pr 931 If the meter needle does not indicate zero when the current input is at zero calibrate the meter using C8 Pr 930 and C9 Pr 930 Refer to the monitor description list page 5 212 and set Pr 54 When the running frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor set the running frequen...

Page 395: ...er to the monitor description list page 5 212 and set Pr 158 AM terminal function selection When the running frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor set the running frequency or current value at which the output signal will be 10 V using Pr 55 or Pr 56 beforehand If the meter needle does not point to maximum even at maximum output calibrate it with C1 Pr 901 Fig 5 90 Connec...

Page 396: ...e 5 198 50 Power saving monitor 51 Cumulative power saving monitor 774 M101 Operation panel monitor selection 1 9999 775 M102 Operation panel monitor selection 2 776 M103 Operation panel monitor selection 3 992 M104 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection 0 set frequency 54 M300 FM CA terminal function selection 1 output frequency Refer to page 5 211 50 Power saving monitor 158 M301 AM...

Page 397: ...96 M204 Power unit cost 9999 0 to 500 Set the power unit cost The power cost savings are displayed on the energy saving monitor 9999 No function 897 M205 Power saving monitor average time 9999 0 Average of 30 minutes 1 to 1000 h Average of the set time 9999 No function 898 M206 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 9999 0 Cumulative monitor value clear 1 Cumulative monitor value hold 10 Continue a...

Page 398: ...ial power supply operation input power monitor 0 01 kW 0 1 kW 9999 9999 Power saving rate The power saving ratio with the commercial power supply operation as 100 0 1 0 The power saving ratio with Pr 893 as 100 1 Average power saving The average power saving per hour during a predetermined time Pr 897 0 01kWh 0 1 kWh 9999 9999 0 to 1000 h Average power saving rate The average power saving ratio wi...

Page 399: ...g rate considering the consumed power during the power supply operation estimated value as 100 is displayed Pr 895 Power saving rate reference value needs to be set to 0 Energy saving monitor reference motor capacity Energy saving monitored item Description and formula Incre ment Parameter setting Pr 895 Pr 896 Pr 897 Pr 899 Power saving amount The cumulative power saving is added up per hour Powe...

Page 400: ...tive monitors the monitor data digit can be shifted to the right by the number of Pr 891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times setting For example if the cumulative power value is 1278 56 kWh when Pr 891 2 the PU DU display is 12 78 display in 100 kWh increments and the communication data is 12 If the maximum value is exceeded when Pr 891 0 to 4 the value is clamped at the maximum value ind...

Page 401: ...ration pattern and rating current output frequency Pr 3 Base frequency I002619E Fig 5 92 Cumulative energy saving monitor NOTE The power saving cumulative monitor value is saved every hour This means that if the power is turned OFF after less than an hour when then the power is turned ON again the previously saved monitor value is displayed and accumulation starts In some cases the cumulative moni...

Page 402: ...ulate the annual power saving amount from Pr 899 Operation time rate estimated value and the average power saving monitor When the power cost per hour is set in Pr 896 Power unit cost the annual power cost savings can be monitored Estimated consumed power during commercial power supply operation kW Pr 893 kW Consumed power Pr 892 100 100 NOTE In commercial power supply operation because the rotati...

Page 403: ...20 326 328 to 330 342 191 M401 SU terminal function selection 1 SU Up to frequency 192 M402 IPF terminal function selection 2 IPF Instantaneous power failure undervoltage 9999 193 M403 OL terminal function selection 3 OL Overload warning 194 M404 FU terminal function selection 4 FU Output frequency detection 195 M405 ABC1 terminal function selection Relay output terminal 99 ALM Fault 0 to 5 7 8 10...

Page 404: ... 150 10 110 PU PU operation mode Output when PU operation mode is selected Pr 79 5 119 11 111 RY Inverter operation ready Output when the reset process is completed after powering ON the inverter when starting is possible by switching the start signal ON or during operation 5 238 12 112 Y12 Output current detection Output when the output current is higher than the Pr 150 setting for the time set i...

Page 405: ...re charge operation reaches the time limit set in Pr 764 or Pr 769 52 152 Y52 Second pre charge time over 53 153 Y53 Pre charge level over Output when the measured value before reaching the ending time during pre charge operation is higher than the detection level set in Pr 763 or Pr 768 54 154 Y54 Second pre charge level over 57 157 IPM During PM motor control Output while the control method is P...

Page 406: ... Pr 322 Output when the control circuit capacitor approaches the end of its life Pr 255 to Pr 259 5 91 87 187 Y87 Main circuit capacitor life for Pr 313 to Pr 322 Output when the main circuit capacitor approaches the end of its life 88 188 Y88 Cooling fan life for Pr 313 to Pr 322 Output when the cooling fan approaches the end of its life 89 189 Y89 Inrush current limit circuit life for Pr 313 to ...

Page 407: ...er second PID control 203 303 PID2 Second During PID control activated Output during second PID control 204 304 SLEEP2 During second PID output shutoff Output during second PID output suspension function operation Pr 753 to Pr 758 Pr 1147 to Pr 1149 205 305 Y205 Second PID deviation limit Output when the absolute deviation value during second PID control exceeds the limit value Pr 753 to Pr 758 Pr...

Page 408: ...re warning 226 326 Y226 Auxiliary pressure pump operation Output when the PID deviation exceeds the auxiliary pressure pump operation starting level Pr 1374 Pr 1375 228 328 DRY Dry run Output when a dry run state is detected Pr 42 Pr 43 Pr 132 Pr 1144 Pr 1370 229 329 Y229 PID input pressure warning Output when the pump inlet pressure reaches the warning level Pr 1370 Pr 1373 Pr 1377 Pr 1378 Pr 138...

Page 409: ...A1B1C1 or A2B2C2 The life of the relay contacts will be shortened Fig 5 94 Adjusting the RUN signal response level I002620E NOTES When Pr 157 OL signal output timer is set for the Overload warning OL signal output the OL signal is output when the set time of Pr 157 Pr 289 elapses For the output signal and the fault code output on page 5 249 used in the PLC function on page 5 439 the Pr 289 setting...

Page 410: ...utput is ON and when the inverter stops it turns OFF According to the inverter condition the ON OFF operation of each signal is as shown below OFF during power failure or undervoltage Output is shutoff in conditions like a fault and when the MRS signal is ON OFF while power is not supplied to the main circuit power supply I003030E Fig 5 95 Ready and motor running signals Output signal Start signal...

Page 411: ...logic or 194 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal The ALM signal is assigned to the A1B1C1 contacts in the initial status Output signal Pr 190 to Pr 196 settings Positive logic Negative logic RY 11 111 RUN 0 100 RUN3 45 145 Tab 5 103 Assignment of the signals NOTE The RUN signal positive logic is assigned to the ...

Page 412: ...hort circuit RS 485 terminal power supply short circuit E CTE Output side earth ground fault overcurrent E GF Output phase loss E LF Brake transistor alarm detection E BE Internal circuit fault E 13 E PBT Tab 5 104 Faults that lead to Y91 signal output Parameters referred to Pr 13 Starting frequency page 5 115 page 5 117 Pr 76 Fault code output selection page 5 252 Pr Name Initial value Setting ra...

Page 413: ... the set frequency The Pr 41 value can be adjusted within the range 1 to 100 considering the set frequency as 100 This parameter can be used to check that the set frequency has been reached and provide signals such as the operation start signal for related equipment Fig 5 97 Output of the SU signal I002626E SU Set frequency Adjustment range Pr 41 Time OFF OFF ON Output frequency Hz ...

Page 414: ... the electromagnetic brake operation during forward rotation lifting and reverse rotation lowering in operations such as lift opera tion When Pr 43 9999 forward rotation uses the Pr 42 setting and reverse rotation uses the Pr 43 setting WhenoutputtingafrequencydetectionsignalseparatelyfromtheFU FB signal setthedetection frequency in Pr 50 When the output frequency reaches the Pr 50 setting or high...

Page 415: ...l s reference frequency differs by the control method Setting a higher value in Pr 870 slows the response of frequency detection signals SU FB FB2 Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Parameters referred to Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function sele...

Page 416: ...Name Initial value Setting range Description FM CA 150 M460 Output current detection level 120 110 0 to 220 Set the output current detection level 100 is the inverter rated current 151 M461 Output current detection signal delay time 0s 0 to 10 s Set the output current detection time Set the time from when the output current reaches the setting or higher until the output current detection Y12 signa...

Page 417: ...t whether the inverter output stops or the inverter operation continues when Y13 signal turns ON by setting Pr 167 Pr 167 setting When Y12 signal turns ON When Y13 signal turns ON 0 Initial value Continuous operation Continuous operation 1 Inverter trip E CDO Continuous operation 10 Continuous operation Inverter trip E CDO 11 Inverter trip E CDO Inverter trip E CDO Tab 5 106 Selecting the behaviou...

Page 418: ... not too long When the output current is low and torque is not generated the detection signal may not be output Even when using the zero current detection signal a safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided to prevent hazardous machine or equipment conditions Parameters referred to Online auto tuning page 5 327 Offline auto tuning page 5 45 page 5 316 Pr 190 to Pr 196 output termina...

Page 419: ...90 RUN terminal function selection 96 positive logic and 1 H01 is set in Pr 496 the terminal RUN turns ON Any value Y0 to Y6 are available when the extension output option FR A8AY is installed RA1 to RA3 are available hen the relay output option FR A8AR is installed Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 495 M500 Remote output selection 0 0 Remote output data is cleared when the power sup...

Page 420: ...ot turn ON OFF even if 0 or 1 is set in the terminal bits of Pr 496 and Pr 497 ON OFF is performed with the assigned functions When Pr 495 1 or 11 remote output data retention at power OFF take measures such as con necting R1 L11 with P and S1 L21 with N so that the control power is retained If the control power is not retained the output signal after turning ON the power is not guaranteed to work...

Page 421: ...FF Remote output data is cleared during an inverter reset 1 Remote output data is retained when the power supply is turned OFF 10 Remote output data is cleared when the power supply is turned OFF Remote output data is retained during an inverter reset 11 Remote output data is retained when the power supply is turned OFF 656 M531 Analog remote output 1 1000 800 to 1200 Value output from the termina...

Page 422: ...A WhenPr 158 AMterminalfunctionselection 87 88 89 or90 ananalogvoltagecanbeoutput from the terminal AM Terminal AM output V 10 V analog remote output value 1000 100 The output range is 10 V to 10 V regardless of the Pr 290 Monitor negative output selection setting I002634E Fig 5 107 Terminal CA output I002635E Fig 5 108 Terminal AM output 20 1100 1200 800 1000 0 Output current mA Analog remote out...

Page 423: ...remote analog output data retention at power OFF take measures such as connecting R1 L11 with P and S1 L21 with N so that the control power is retained while power is supplied to R L1 S L2 and T L3 If the control power is not retained the analog output after turning ON the power is not guaranteed to work When connecting the high power factor converter FR HC2 assign the instantaneous power failure ...

Page 424: ...tial value Setting range Description 76 M510 Fault code output selection 0 0 Without fault code output 1 With fault code output Refer to the table below 2 Fault code is output only when a fault occurs Refer to the table below Operation panel indication FR DU08 Output terminal operation Fault code SU IPF OL FU Normal 0 0 0 0 0 E OC1 0 0 0 1 1 E OC2 0 0 1 0 2 E OC3 0 0 1 1 3 E OV1 to E OV3 0 1 0 0 4...

Page 425: ...lue 79 positive logic 179 negative logic to any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 Output terminal function selection Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 799 M520 Pulse increment setting for output power 1 kWh 0 1 kWh 1 kWh 10 kWh 100 kWh 1000 kWh Pulse train output of output power Y79 is output in pulses at every output power kWh that is specified I002834E Fig 5 110 Pulse train output of output powe...

Page 426: ...rature reaches the Pr 663 setting or higher For the Y207 signal set 207 positive logic or 307 negative logic in one of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 663 M060 Control circuit temperature signal output level 0 C 0 to 100 C Set the temperature where the Y207 signal turns ON NOTES The Y2...

Page 427: ...calibration Stall prevention operation level setting voltage current bias and gain P T110 to P T113 P T410 to P T413 P M043 Pr 241 C16 to C19 Pr 919 to Pr 920 C38 to C41 Pr 932 to Pr 933 5 273 To continue operating at analog current input loss 4 mA input check P T052 to P T054 Pr 573 Pr 777 Pr 778 5 264 To assign functions to input terminals Input terminal function selection P T700 to P T711 P T74...

Page 428: ...tings shown in the table below cause a failure Other incorrect settings result in an incorrect operation I002637E Fig 5 111 Voltage current input switches Setting causing a failure Operation Switch setting Terminal input ON currentinput Voltage input Causes an analog signal output circuit failure in an external device due to increased loads on the signal output circuit of the external device OFF V...

Page 429: ...67 setting Terminal 4 input Switch 2 0 initial value 4 to 20 mA ON 1 0 to 5 V OFF 2 0 to 10 V OFF Tab 5 110 Setting of parameter 267 NOTES To enable the terminal 4 turn the AU signal ON Set the parameters and the switch settings so that they agree Incorrect setting may cause a fault failure or malfunction Terminal 1 frequency setting auxiliary input is added to the terminal 2 or 4 main speed setti...

Page 430: ...input Terminal Inverter internal power source voltage Frequency setting resolution Pr 73 terminal 2 input voltage 10 5 V DC 0 030 Hz 60 Hz 0 to 5 V DC input 10E 10 V DC 0 015 Hz 60 Hz 0 to 10 V DC input Tab 5 111 Built in power supply voltage Fig 5 112 Frequency setting by voltage 0 to 5V DC I002638E_G Fig 5 113 Frequency setting by voltage 0 to 10 V DC I002639E_G Fig 5 114 Frequency setting by vo...

Page 431: ...g Pr 73 to a value of 10 to 17 enables the polarity reversible operation Setting input 0 to 5 V or 0 to 10 V to the terminal 1 allows the operation of forward reverse rotation by the polarity Fig 5 115 Frequency setting by current 4 to 20 mA DC I002641E_G Fig 5 116 Frequency setting by current 4 to 20 mA DC I002642E_G Fig 5 117 CompensationinputcharacteristicswhenSTFisON I002643E STF PC 4 5 AU 2 4...

Page 432: ...equency setting gain frequency page 5 266 Pr 252 Pr 253 Override bias gain page 5 261 Pr 561 PTC thermistor protection level page 5 150 Pr 858 Terminal 4 function assignment page 5 260 Pr 868 Terminal 1 function assignment page 5 260 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 868 T010 Terminal 1 function assignment 0 0 4 9999 Select the terminal 1 function Refer to the table below 858 T040 Te...

Page 433: ...o 20 mA The degree of addition compensation to terminal 2 is adjustable with Pr 242 The degree of addition compensation to terminal 4 is adjustable with Pr 243 Analog command value with use of terminal 2 terminal 2 input terminal 1 input Pr 242 100 Analog command value with use of terminal 4 terminal 4 input terminal 1 input Pr 243 100 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 73 T000 Analog...

Page 434: ...187E Fig 5 119 Auxiliary input characteristics NOTE After changing the Pr 73 setting check the voltage current input switch setting Incorrect setting may cause a fault failure or malfunction For the settings refer to page 5 255 Fig 5 120 Connection example for the override function I002645E_G When voltage across terminals 2 and 5 is 2 5 V 5 V Output frequency Terminal 1 5 V 10 V 2 5 V 5 V 2 5 V 5 ...

Page 435: ...put compensation selection 1 with compensation initial value 0 After changing the Pr 73 setting check the voltage current input switch setting Incorrect setting may cause a fault failure or malfunction For the settings refer to page 5 255 Parameters referred to Pr 28 Multi speed input compensation selection page 5 60 Pr 73 Analog input selection page 5 255 Voltage across terminals 2 and 5 Initial ...

Page 436: ...ess 822 T003 Speed setting filter 1 9999 0 to 5 s Set the primary delay filter time constant to the external speed command analog input command 9999 Use the Pr 74 setting 832 T005 Speed setting filter 2 9999 0 to 5 s 9999 Second function of Pr 822 enabled when the RT signal is ON 849 T007 Analog input offset adjustment 100 0 to 200 Make the analog speed input terminal 2 have an offset This prevent...

Page 437: ...he RT signal is ON Analog speed command input offset adjustment Pr 849 This is used to set a range in which the motor is stopped for prevention of incorrect motor operation in a very low speed rotation by the analog input speed command Regarding the Pr 849 Analog input offset adjustment value 100 is 0 the offset voltage is set as described below 100 Pr 849 Positive side 100 Pr 849 Negative side Th...

Page 438: ...setting gain 100 0 to 300 Set the converted on the gain side voltage current of the terminal 2 input C5 904 T400 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the terminal 4 input bias side frequency C6 904 T401 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 20 0 to 300 Set the converted on the bias side current voltage of terminal 4 input 126 905 T402 T042 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain ...

Page 439: ...equency setting bias C5 Pr 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency C6 Pr 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Pr 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency C4 Pr 903 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain Pr 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency C7 Pr 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 4 Stall prevention operation level C16 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque C17 Pr 919 Ter...

Page 440: ...5 Set the bias frequency of the terminal 1 input using C12 Pr 917 It is initially set to the frequency at 0 V Set the gain frequency of the terminal 1 input using C14 Pr 918 It is initially set to the frequency at 10 V Set the bias frequency of the terminal 4 input using C5 Pr 904 It is initially set to the frequency at 4 mA Settheoutputfrequencyfor20mAofthefrequencycommandcurrent 4to20mA byusingP...

Page 441: ...ith voltage input to terminal 1 sets terminal 2 4 analog value terminal 1 analog value as the analog calibration value Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage current input signal with Pr 73 Pr 267 and the voltage current input selection switch Analog command terminals 2 4 depending on Pr 73 Pr 267 and voltage current input switch Pr 241 0 initial value Pr 241 1 0 to 5 V input 0 to 5...

Page 442: ...to display Selecting the parameter number Turn to choose C4 Pr 903 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain for the terminal 2 and C7 Pr 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain for the terminal 4 Analog voltage current display Press to display the analog voltage current currently applied to the terminal 2 4 Do not touch until calibration is completed Voltage current application Apply a 5 V 20 mA Turn the e...

Page 443: ...ain for the terminal 2 and C7 Pr 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain for the terminal 4 Analog voltage current display Press to display the analog voltage current currently applied to the terminal 2 4 Analog voltage current adjustment When is turned the gain voltage current currently set to the parameter is displayed When until the desired gain voltage current is displayed Setting completed Pres...

Page 444: ... 218 If the gain and bias of voltage current setting voltage are too close an error Er3 may be dis played at setting Changing C4 Pr 903 or C7 Pr 905 gain adjustment will not change Pr 20 Input to the terminal 1 frequency setting auxiliary input is added to the frequency setting signal For operation outline of the parameter unit FR PU07 refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR PU07 To set the valu...

Page 445: ... Name Initial value Setting range Description C16 919 T110 Terminal 1 bias command torque 0 0 to 400 Set the stall prevention operation level of the bias side of terminal 1 input C17 919 T111 Terminal 1 bias torque 0 0 to 300 Set the converted on bias side voltage of terminal 1 input C18 920 T112 Terminal 1 gain command torque 150 0 to 400 Set the stall prevention operation level of the gain maxim...

Page 446: ...y speed setting auxiliary C2 Pr 902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency C3 Pr 902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias C5 Pr 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency C6 Pr 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Pr 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency C4 Pr 903 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain Pr 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency C7 Pr 905 Terminal 4 frequency s...

Page 447: ...th C18 Pr 920 Initial value is 10 V Set the bias value of the terminal 4 input using C38 Pr 932 The initial value is the stall prevention operation level for 4 mA Set the the stall prevention operation level against the 20 mA for input current 4 to 20 mA with C40 Pr 933 I002648E Fig 5 125 Signal adjustment of terminal 1 I002649E Fig 5 126 Signal adjustment of terminal 4 400 150 0 0 0 Gain C18 Pr 9...

Page 448: ...ng Pr 241 Theanaloginputdisplayunit V mA foranalog inputbiasandgaincalibrationcanbechanged Depending on the terminal input specification set to Pr 73 and Pr 267 the display units of C17 Pr 919 C19 Pr 920 C39 Pr 932 and C41 Pr 933 will change as shown below NOTE Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage input signal with Pr 73 Pr 267 and the volt age current input selection switch Analo...

Page 449: ...eter selection Turn until appears Press to display Selecting the parameter number Turn to choose C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain torque for the terminal 1 and C41 Pr 933 Terminal 4 gain torque for the terminal 4 Analog voltage current display Press to display the analog voltage current currently applied to the terminal 1 4 Do not touch until calibration is completed Voltage current application Apply a ...

Page 450: ...the terminal 1 and C41 Pr 933 Terminal 4 gain torque for the terminal 4 Analog voltage current display Press to display the analog voltage current currently applied to the terminal 1 4 Analog voltage current adjustment When is turned the gain voltage current currently set to the parameter is displayed Turn until the desired gain voltage current is displayed Setting completed Press to enter the set...

Page 451: ... STF or STR to apply a voltage across terminals 1 and 5 4 and 5 Operation is performed with 130 stall prevention operation level Tab 5 124 Adjusting only the stall prevention operation level without adjustment of a voltage current NOTES If the gain and bias of the stall prevention operation level setting are too close an error Er3 may be displayed at setting For operation outline of the parameter ...

Page 452: ...output frequency before the current input loss 2 4 mA input fault is activated when the current input loss is detected 3 Decelerates to stop when the current input loss is detected After it is stopped 4 mA input fault E LCI is activated 4 Continues operation with the Pr 777 setting 9999 No current input check 777 T053 4 mA input check operation frequency 9999 0 to 590 Hz Set the running frequency ...

Page 453: ...ion PID control reverse action I001197E Fig 5 128 4mA input check during external operation Pr 573 1 or 4 I001198E Fig 5 129 4mA input check during PID control reverse action Pr 573 1 or 4 NOTE When the setting is changed to continuously operate after the input current loss Pr 573 1 4 the motor will operate as the frequency before loss is 0 Hz 20 mA 4 mA 2 mA 3 mA Output frequency Analog input Pr ...

Page 454: ...he analog current input is restored during the deceleration it will accelerate again and operate according to the current input PID control reverse action I002650E Fig 5 130 Fault output Pr 573 2 I002651E Fig 5 131 Fault output after deceleration to stop Pr 573 3 STF Output frequency Set point fixed Measured value 20 mA 4 mA LF signal PID signal ALM signal E LCI occurs Input current decrease Retur...

Page 455: ...everse action I002768E Fig 5 132 Fault output after deceleration under PID control reverse action Pr 573 3 STF Output frequency 20 mA 4 mA Set point fixed Measured value LF signal PID signal OFF during deceleration Input current decrease 2mA 3 mA Return Decelerates as the input current is lost Normal operation after the current is restored Time ...

Page 456: ...e operation continuation due to current input loss and retry was a success operation will continue without clearing the operation continuation frequency 5 164 Added compensation override compensation During operation with added compensation or override compensation and transferred to operation continuation due to input current loss added compensation and override compensation will become invalid T...

Page 457: ...ction 2 RH High speed operation command 183 T705 RT terminal function selection 3 RT Second function selection 184 T706 AU terminal function selection 4 AU Terminal 4 input selection 185 T707 JOG terminal function selection 5 JOG Jog operation selection 186 T708 CS terminal function selection 9999 No function 187 T709 MRS terminal function selection 24 MRS Output stop 10 X10 Inverter run enable si...

Page 458: ...10 X10 Inverter run enable signal FR HC2 FR CV FR CC2 connection Pr 30 Pr 599 5 552 11 X11 FR HC2 FR CC2 connection instantaneous power failure detection Pr 30 5 552 12 X12 PU operation external interlock Pr 79 5 119 13 X13 External DC injection brake operation start Pr 10 to Pr 12 5 545 14 X14 PID control valid terminal Pr 127 to Pr 134 Pr 575 to Pr 577 5 353 16 X16 PU External operation switchov...

Page 459: ...lid terminal Pr 753 to Pr 758 5 353 81 PGT PID gain tuning start forced end Pr 1211 to Pr 1219 5 373 84 X84 Emergency drive execution command Pr 514 Pr 515 Pr 523 Pr 524 Pr 1013 5 167 94 X94 Control signal input for main circuit power supply MC Pr 30 Pr 137 Pr 248 Pr 254 5 342 95 X95 Converter unit fault input Pr 57 Pr 58 Pr 135 to Pr 139 Pr 159 5 333 96 X96 Converter unit fault input E OHT E CPU ...

Page 460: ... to 50 ms Example of STF signal operation I002652E Fig 5 133 Adjusting the response of input terminal Pr 699 NOTE Setting of Pr 699 is disabled no filter in the following cases Input terminal is already turned ON when the power is turned ON Input signal used for the PLC function Inverter run enable signal X10 signal STF Output frequency Pr 699 9999 Pr 699 Pr 699 OFF ON Time ...

Page 461: ...gnal is entered into the inverter To coast the motor to a stop When the start signal is turned OFF the inverter decelerates the motor to a stop in the preset deceleration time but when the MRS signal is turned ON the motor coasts to a stop MRS signal logic inversion Pr 17 2 WhenPr 17 2 theMRSsignalcanbechangedtonormallyclosed NCcontact specification Thein verter will shut off the output with MRS s...

Page 462: ...tput shutoff Tab 5 127 Output shutoff by external terminal or communication NOTES The MRS signal is assigned to the terminal MRS in the initial status By setting 24 in either Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection the RT signal can be assigned to the other terminal When using an external terminal to input the MRS signal the MRS signal shuts off the output in any of the operation modes ...

Page 463: ...e acceleration deceleration time by break point acceleration deceleration Switching characteristics of main motor and sub motor Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 155 T730 RT signal function validity condition selection 0 0 Second function is immediately enabled with ON of RT signal 10 Second function will be enabled while RT signal is ON and running in constant speed Disabled while a...

Page 464: ...Pr 706 Pr 707 Pr 711 Pr 712 Pr 717 Pr 721 Pr 724 Pr 725 Pr 859 Pr 453 to Pr 457 Pr 560 Pr 569 Pr 458 to Pr 462 Pr 738 to Pr 747 Pr 860 5 303 5 316 Offline auto tuning Pr 96 Pr 463 5 303 5 316 Online auto tuning Pr 95 Pr 574 5 327 PID control Pr 127 to Pr 134 Pr 753 to Pr 758 5 353 PID Pre charge function Pr 760 to Pr 764 Pr 765 to Pr 769 5 385 Speed control gain Pr 820 Pr 821 Pr 830 Pr 831 5 55 An...

Page 465: ...for the frequency setting signal For multi speed operation refer to page 5 60 By setting Pr 250 1000 to 1100 8888 STF signal becomes start command and STF signal becomes forward reverse command Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description Start signal STF STR Stop operation Refer to page 5 293 250 G106 Stop selection 9999 0 to 100 s STF signal Forward rotation start STR signal Reverse rotation ...

Page 466: ...en OFF Inverter will perform deceleration stop by turning the STP STOP signal OFF once I002657E_G Fig 5 139 2 wire type connection example Pr 250 8888 NOTES By setting Pr 250 0 to 100 1000 to 1100 it will perform coast to stop when the start command is turned OFF Refer to page 5 293 The STF and STR signals are assigned to the STF and STR terminals in the initial status STF signal can be assigned t...

Page 467: ...connection example Pr 250 8888 STF STR PC STP STOP STF STR STP STOP Time Inverter Forward rotation start Stop Reverse rotation start Reverse rotation Forward rotation Output frequency ON ON OFF OFF ON STF STR STP STOP STF STR PC STP STOP ON ON ON ON OFF OFF Time Inverter Start Stop Forward rotation reverse rotation Forward rotation Reverse rotation Output frequency ...

Page 468: ...he JOG signal STP STOP signal will be disa bled Even when the output is stopped by turning ON the MRS signal self holding function is not can celled STF STR Pr 250 setting and inverter condition 0 to 100 s 9999 1000 s to 1100 s 8888 OFF OFF Stop Stop OFF ON Reverse rotation ON OFF Forward rotation Forward rotation ON ON Stop Reverse rotation Tab 5 129 Start signal selection Parameters referred to ...

Page 469: ...imizing the performance of the PM motor PM motor offline auto tuning P C000 P C100 to P C108 P C110 P C120 P C122 P C123 P C126 P C130 to P C133 P C150 P C182 P C185 P C200 to P C208 P C210 P C220 P C222 P C223 P C226 P C230 to P C233 P C282 P C285 Pr 9 Pr 51 Pr 71 Pr 80 Pr 81 Pr 83 Pr 84 Pr 90 Pr 92 Pr 93 Pr 96 Pr 450 Pr 453 Pr 454 Pr 456 to Pr 458 Pr 460 Pr 461 Pr 463 Pr 684 Pr 702 Pr 706 Pr 707...

Page 470: ...stable 5 points V F Refer to page 5 542 20 Mitsubishi standard motor SF JR 4P 1 5 kW or lower 40 Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF HR 50 Mitsubishi constant torque motor SF HRCA 70 Mitsubishi high performance energy saving motor SF PR 210 IPM motor MM EFS 1500 r min specification MM THE4 240 IPM motor MM EFS 3000 r min specification 8090 IPM motor other than MM EFS MM THE4 9090 SPM motor 3 4 Sta...

Page 471: ... 93 Pr 461 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 0 to 3600 mΩ 9999 0 1 mΩ Pr 94 Pr 462 0 to 500 Ω 9999 0 01 Ω 0 to 100 Ω 9999 0 01 Ω 15 Constant torque motor 6 Standard motor Delta connection 16 Constant torque motor 9999 initial value No second applied motor NOTES Regardless of the Pr 71 Pr 450 setting offline auto tuning can be performed according to Pr 96 Pr 463 Auto tuning setting status Refer to page 5 45 f...

Page 472: ...63 Pr 96 Frequency search gain Pr 560 Pr 298 Online auto tuning selection Pr 574 Pr 95 Induced voltage constant phi f Pr 738 Pr 706 Motor Ld decay ratio Pr 739 Pr 711 Motor Lq decay ratio Pr 740 Pr 712 Starting resistance tuning compensation Pr 741 Pr 717 Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width Pr 742 Pr 721 Maximum motor frequency Pr 743 Pr 702 Motor inertia integer Pr 744 Pr 707 Mo...

Page 473: ...ion 0 When the Pr 0 setting is changed from its initial value the automatic change is not performed Inverter Pr 0 value after automatic change Pr 12 value after automatic change FR F820 FR F840 Standard motor Constant torque motor SF PR Standard motor Constant torque motor SF PR Pr 81 2 4 6 Pr 81 2 Pr 81 4 Pr 81 6 00046 0 75K 00023 0 75K 6 6 4 7 4 6 6 4 4 4 4 00077 1 5K 00038 1 5K 4 4 3 5 8 5 3 7 ...

Page 474: ...rrent could increase depending on the load conditions When the protective function such as the electronic thermal O L relay E THT E THM or the stall prevention OL E OLT etc is activated adjust the Pr 0 Torque boost setting according to the load E CAUTION Make sure to set this parameter correctly according to the motor used Incorrect setting may cause the motor and inverter to overheat and burn Par...

Page 475: ...e set 80 C101 Motor capacity 9999 0 4 to 55 kW Set the applied motor capacity 0 to 3600 kW 9999 V F control 81 C102 Number of motor poles 9999 2 4 6 8 10 12 Set the number of motor poles 9999 V F control 9 C103 Electronic thermal O L relay Inverter rated current 0 to 500 A Set the rated motor current 0 to 3600 A 83 C104 Rated motor voltage 200 400 V 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage V 84 C10...

Page 476: ...tions as Pr 71 9999 The function is disabled 453 C201 Second motor capacity 9999 0 4 to 55 kW Set the capacity of the second motor 0 to 3600 kW 9999 V F control 454 C202 Number of second motor poles 9999 2 4 6 8 10 12 Set the number of poles of the second motor 9999 V F control 51 C203 Second electronic thermal O L relay 9999 0 to 500 A This function is enabled when the RT signal is ON Set the rat...

Page 477: ...0 to 32767 The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for the frequency search of the second motor 9999 Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi motor SF PR SF JR SF HR SF JRCA SF HRCA and so on NOTES The function is enabled under Advanced magnetic flux vector control Even if a motor other than Mitsubishi standard motors SF JR 0 4 kW or higher high efficiency motors SF HR 0 4 kW or ...

Page 478: ...chanical brake is released Offline auto tuning is not performed correctly when the surge voltage suppression filter FR ASF H FR BMF H are inserted between the inverter and motor Be sure to remove them before performing tuning Setting To perform tuning set the following parameters about the motor Differs according to the voltage class 200 V 400 V According to the Pr 71 setting the range of the moto...

Page 479: ...C etc 1 13 14 Mitsubishi high performance energy saving motor SF PR 70 73 74 Other manufacturer s standard motor 0 initial value 3 4 5 star connection motor 6 delta connection motor Other manufacturer s constant torque motor 1 13 14 15 star connection motor 16 deltaconnection motor Tab 5 134 Motor selection NOTES If Pr 11 DC injection brake operation time 0 or Pr 12 DC injection brake operation vo...

Page 480: ... value Input terminals effective signals STP STOP OH MRS RT RES STF STR S1 and S2 Output terminals RUN OL IPF FM CA AM A1B1C1 and SO When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM CA and AM the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in fifteen steps from FM CA and AM Do not perform ON OFF switching of the Second function selection RT signal during offline ...

Page 481: ...n Pr 96 101 Approx 40 s The following offline auto tuning time is set according to the acceleration deceleration time setting Offline auto tuning time acceleration time deceleration time approx 30 s Tab 5 137 Offline auto tuning time when the initial value is set NOTES The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the offline au...

Page 482: ...tivated Set the acceleration deceleration time longer Set Pr 156 1 92 The converter output voltage has dropped to 75 of the rated voltage Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation Check the Pr 84 Rated motor frequency setting 93 Calculation error The motor is not connected Check the Pr 83 and Pr 84 settings Check the motor wiring and make the setting again 94 Rotation tuning frequency setting...

Page 483: ... of mH Set Pr 71 as shown below Use the following formula to find the Pr 94 setting value and set a given value as the motor constant parameter Motor Pr 71 setting Mitsubishi standard motor Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF JR 0 initial value SF JR 4P 1 5 kW or lower 20 SF HR 40 Mitsubishi constant torque motor SF JRCA 4P 1 SF HRCA 50 Mitsubishi high performance energy saving motor SF PR 70 Tab ...

Page 484: ... 0 01 mH 93 461 Motor constant L2 q axis inductance Lq 0 to 6000 mH 9999 0 1 mH 0 to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 94 462 Motor constant X 0 to 100 9999 0 1 0 01 859 860 Torque current Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 01A 0 to 3600 A 9999 0 1 A 298 560 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767 9999 1 Tab 5 140 Parameter setting ranges NOTE If 9999 is set tuning data will be invalid and the constant values fo...

Page 485: ...6000mH 9999 0 1 mH 0 to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 93 461 Motor constant L2 q axis inductance Lq 0 to 6000mH 9999 0 1 mH 0 to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 94 462 Motor constant X 0 to 100 9999 0 1 0 01 859 860 Torque current Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 01 A 0 to 3600 A 9999 0 1 A 298 560 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767 9999 1 0 to 32767 9999 1 Tab 5 142 Parameter setting ranges NOTES As the motor co...

Page 486: ...999 0 01 A 9999 0 to 3600 A 9999 0 1 A 90 458 Motor constant r1 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 91 459 Motor constant r2 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 92 460 Motor constant 1 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 0 to 3600 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 93 461 Motor constant 2 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 0 to 3600 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 94 462 Motor constant m 0 to 500 Ω 9999 0 01 Ω 0 to 100 Ω 9999 859 86...

Page 487: ...t L2 q axis inductance Lq Pr 461 Pr 93 Motor constant X Pr 462 Pr 94 Auto tuning setting status Pr 463 Pr 96 Frequency search gain Pr 560 Pr 298 Tab 5 144 Validation of parameters by the RT signal NOTES The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to another terminal Changing the termin...

Page 488: ... capacity setting 0 to 3600 kW 9999 V F control 81 C102 Number of motor poles 9999 2 4 6 8 10 12 Set the number of motor poles 9999 V F control 9 C103 Electronic thermal O L relay Inverter rated current 0 to 500 A Set the rated motor current 0 to 3600 A 83 C104 Rated motor voltage 200 400 V 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage V 84 C105 Rated motor frequency 9999 10 to 400 Hz Set the rated moto...

Page 489: ...h 9999 0 to 6000 μs 10000 to 16000 μs 9999 725 C133 Motor protection current level 9999 100 to 500 Set the maximum current OCT level of the motor 9999 Uses the MM EFS MM THE4 constant for the IPM motor MM EFS MM THE4 and 200 for a PM motor other than MM EFS MM THE4 450 C200 Second applied motor 9999 0 1 3 to 6 13 to 16 20 23 24 40 43 44 50 53 54 70 73 74 210 213 214 240 243 244 8090 8093 8094 9090...

Page 490: ...tomatically set 9999 Uses the MM EFS MM THE4 constant for the IPM motor MM EFS MM THE4 and the inverter internal data for a PM motor other than MM EFS MM THE4 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 460 C222 Second motor constant L1 d axis inductance Ld 9999 0 to 500 mH 9999 0 to 50 mH 9999 461 C223 Second motor constant L2 q axis inductance Lq 9999 0 to 500 mH 9999 0 to 50 mH 9999 860 C226 Second motor torque current R...

Page 491: ... is 400 Hz The motor may rotate slightly even if the offline auto tuning without motor rotation Pr 96 Auto tuning setting status 1 or 11 is selected It does not affect the tuning performance Fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or before tuning make sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications NOTES The settings are valid und...

Page 492: ...ncy Hz 83 456 Rated motor voltage Rated motor voltage V Rated motorvoltage V written on the motor s rated plate 71 450 Applied motor 8090 8093 IPM motor 9090 9093 SPM motor 210 213 240 243 96 463 Auto tuning setting status 1 11 Tab 5 145 Set the parameters before performing tuning Motor Pr 71 setting Motor constant parameter Ω mH and A unit setting Motor constant parameter Internal data setting IP...

Page 493: ...ollowing I O signals are valid initial value Input terminals effective signals STP STOP OH MRS RT RES STF STR S1 and S2 Output terminals RUN OL IPF FM CA AM A1B1C1 and SO When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM CA and AM the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in fifteen steps from FM CA and AM Do not perform ON OFF switching of the Second functi...

Page 494: ... tuning monitor display NOTES The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the offline auto tuning is performed again However the tuning data is cleared by performing all parameter clear Changing Pr 71 after tuning completion will change the motor constant For example if Pr 71 8093 is set after tuning is performed with Pr 71 80...

Page 495: ...ing 93 Calculation error The motor is not connected Check the motor wiring and make the setting again 94 Rotation tuning frequency setting error The frequency command for the tuning was given to exceed the maximum frequency setting or to be in the frequency jump range Check the Pr 1 Maximum frequency and Pr 31 to Pr 36 Frequency jump settings Tab 5 149 Settings for Pr 96 Pr 463 NOTES An instantane...

Page 496: ...s are stored in the EEPROM as motor constant parameters and two types of motor constants can be stored First motor Pr Second motor Pr Name Other than MM EFS MM THE4 Pr 96 Pr 4 63 1 V F control or MM EFS MM THE4 Pr 96 Pr 463 11 Description 90 458 Motor constant R1 Resistance per phase 92 460 Motor constant L1 d axis inductance Ld d axis inductance 93 461 Motor constant L2 q axis inductance Lq q axi...

Page 497: ...ents Initial value 90 458 Motor constant R1 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 9999 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 92 460 Motor constant L1 d axis inductance Ld 0 to 500 mH 9999 0 01 mH 0 to 50 mH 9999 0 001 mH 93 461 Motor constant L2 q axis inductance Lq 0 to 500 mH 9999 s 0 01 mH 0 to 50 mH 9999 0 001 mH 706 738 Induced voltage constant phi f 0 to 5000 mV rad s 9999 0 1 mV rad s 859 860 Torque current Rated PM m...

Page 498: ...onstant phi f 0 to 5000 mV s rad 9999 0 1 mV rad s 859 860 Torque current Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 01 A 0 to 3600 A 9999 0 1 A Tab 5 154 Parameter setting ranges NOTES As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data refer to the following setting example when making setting Setting example To slightly increase Pr 90 value 5 If Pr 90...

Page 499: ...e auto tuning completion Set Pr 95 Online auto tuning selection 1 online auto tuning at start Check that the following parameters are set before starting operation Ifamotorwithsubstantiallylowratedcurrentcomparedwiththeinverterratedcurrentisused speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples etc Set the rated motor current to about 40 or higher of the inverter rated current In t...

Page 500: ...om dropping Use of the start time tuning start X28 signal is recommended to perform tuning Refer to page 5 328 Perform online auto tuning at startup when the motor is stopped The online auto tuning is disabled when the MRS signal is being input the setting speed is Pr 13 Starting frequency or lower V F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control an inverter fault is occurring or the inverter s s...

Page 501: ...xistsafewseconds Completed Tuning is not performedif the Y39 signalis ON While the X28 signal is ON X28 Signal Tuning status at starting Y39 signal Start signal Output frequency OFF OFF OFF ON ON Tune Tuning is not performed at start since X28 signal and Y39 signal is ON Completed 0 Hz Time While the X28 signal is OFF X28 Signal Tuning status at starting Y39 signal Output frequency Start signal OF...

Page 502: ...r completing tuning at start The Inverter running RUN signal is not turned ON during online auto tuning The RUN signal is turned ON after starting up It is disabled during V F control or PM motor control Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection and Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection may affect other functions Set parameters after co...

Page 503: ...or poles Tab 5 156 Related Parameters NOTES The RT signal is a second function selection signal The RT signal also enables other second func tions Refer to page 5 285 The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to another terminal Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189...

Page 504: ...r 609 Pr 610 Pr 753 to Pr 758 Pr 1015 Pr 1134 Pr 1135 Pr 1140 Pr 1141 Pr 1143 to Pr 1149 Pr 1370 Pr 1460 to Pr 1466 5 353 PID control enhanced functions P A440 to P A456 P A627 to P A629 P F031 Pr 111 Pr 1361 to Pr 1375 Pr 1377 to Pr 1381 5 404 To set the constant optimal for PID control PID gain tuning P A690 to P A698 Pr 1211 to Pr 1219 5 373 To continue operating at analog current input loss 4 ...

Page 505: ...eriod that is a little longer than the time period from the ON signal input to the actual pick up operation of MC3 0 3 to 0 5 s 138 A003 Bypass selection at a fault 0 0 Inverter output stop motor coasting at inverter failure 1 Automatic switchover to commercial power supply operation at inverter failure Switchover is not possible when an external thermal relay E OHT or CPU fault E CPU is occurring...

Page 506: ...can act as a complicated interlock between the commercial power supply operation and the inverter operation Connection diagram A typical connection diagram of the electronic bypass sequence is shown below I002668E_G Fig 5 145 Electronic bypass sequence connection diagram Standard models I002848E_G Fig 5 146 Electronic bypass sequence connection diagram Separated converter type MC1 R L1 S L2 T L3 S...

Page 507: ...city Output terminal permissible load Open collector output of inverter RUN SU IPF OL FU 24 V DC 0 1 A Inverter relay output A1 C1 B1 C1 A2 B2 B2 C2 Relay output option FR A8AR 230 V AC 0 3 A 30 V DC 0 3 A NOTES Use the electronic bypass function in External operation mode In addition the wiring terminals R1 L11 and S1 L21 must be connected to a separate power source that does go through MC1 Be su...

Page 508: ...MC2 is OFF When Pr 138 1 electronic bypass valid at a fault MC2 is ON MC operation MC ON MC OFF During inverter operation MC2 OFF MC3 ON During commercial power supply operation MC2 ON MC3 OFF Invariance The status before changing the signal ON or OFF is held Signal Applied terminal Function Operation MC operation MC1 MC2 MC3 MRS MRS Selects whether or not operation is available ON Electronic bypa...

Page 509: ... 5 147 Signal timing when there is no automatic switchover sequence Inverter run command STF Power supply Operation interlock MRS Inverter commercial power supply CS Inverter input side MC MC1 Inverter output side MC MC3 MC for commercial power supply operation MC2 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Each timer Operating status motor speed INV operation Coasting Bypass operation Coast...

Page 510: ... A A B C D ON OFF Output frequency Pr 139 Frequency command Actual motor speed ON OFF INV operation Commercial power supply operation ON OFF A Pr 136 MC switchover interlock time C Pr 57 Restart coasting time B Pr 137 Start waiting time D Pr 58 Restart cushion time Time Time STF MC3 MC2 C A A B C D A A B C D ON OFF Output frequency Frequency command Actual motor speed ON OFF ON OFF Commercial powe...

Page 511: ...eration switched to the inverter operation inverter ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON MC3 turns ON after MC2 turns OFF Waiting time is 4 s while coasting Stop ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON Tab 5 160 Signals after parameter setting Pr 135 1 open collector output terminal of inverter Pr 136 2 0 s Pr 137 1 0 s Set the time until MC3 is actually turned ON and the inverter and motor are electrically connected If ...

Page 512: ...nput terminals STF CS MRS OH return to perform their normal functions When the electronic bypass sequence function Pr 135 1 and PU operation interlock function Pr 79 7 are used at the same time the MRS signal is shared with the PU operation external interlock if the X12 signal is not assigned The inverter operation is available when the MRS and CS signals are ON Set the acceleration time to the le...

Page 513: ...ault X96 Converter unit fault E OHT E CPU X94 Control signal for main circuit power supply MC MC operation Converter status MC1 MC2 MC3 OFF OFF ON Converter fault E OHT Pr 248 2 OFF Converter fault E OHT Pr 248 1 E CPU ON ON ON Converter normal OFF ON ON OFF Converter fault other than the circuit failure fault or E OHT Pr 248 2 Converter fault other than E OHT or E CPU Tab 5 161 Input signals of s...

Page 514: ...ration of MC1 0 3 to 0 5 s 254 A007 Main circuit power OFF waiting time 600 s 1 to 3600 s Set the waiting time until the main circuit power supply is turned OFF after the motor is stopped 9999 The main circuit power supply is turned OFF only when the protective function selected by Pr 248 is activated 30 E300 Regenerative function selection 0 100 101 Power supply to the inverter AC terminals R S a...

Page 515: ...ut side main circuit power supply OFF Set Pr 254 to prevent frequent MC operation Turning ON the start signal turns ON the MC1 signal and closes the MC on the input side main circuit power supply ON After the time set in Pr 137 Start waiting time has passed the inverter starts Set time slightly longer about 0 3 to 0 5 s than the time period from the MC1 ON to the actual pick up operation of the MC...

Page 516: ...f the converter unit is assigned and the terminal to which X94 signal of the inverter is assigned Fault record Inrush current limit circuit fault E IOH CPU fault E CPU CPU fault E 6 CPU fault E 7 Parameter storage device fault E PE Parameter storage device fault E PE2 24 VDC power fault E P24 Operation panel power supply short circuit RS 485 terminals power supply short circuit E CTE Output side e...

Page 517: ...supply power to the main circuit when power is already supplied only to the control circuit set 100 or more in Pr 30 For the separated converter type setting Pr 30 of the converter unit is also required When supplying power to the main circuit is started when power is supplied only to the control circuit there is a little waiting time before starting Repeated operation of the magnetic contactor du...

Page 518: ...with f3 f1 Pr 595 and the inverter accelerates again to f0 f1 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 592 A300 Traverse function selection 0 0 Traverse function invalid 1 Traverse function valid only in External operation mode 2 Traverse function valid regardless of the operation mode 593 A301 Maximum amplitude amount 10 0 to 25 Level of amplitude during traverse operation 594 A302 Amplitu...

Page 519: ...e selected S pattern acceleration deceleration operation occurs only in the range operated at the normal acceleration deceleration time Pr 7 Pr 8 Acceleration deceleration during traverse operation is performed linearly If stall prevention activates during traverse operation traverse operation stops and normal opera tion begins When stall prevention operation is completed the inverter accelerates ...

Page 520: ...reached 1474 A425 Cleaning forward rotation frequency 9999 0 to 590 Hz Set the forward rotation frequency for cleaning operation 9999 As set in Pr 1472 1475 A426 Cleaning forward rotation operation time 9999 0 to 3600 s Set the operating time after the cleaning forward rotation frequency is reached 9999 As set in Pr 1473 1476 A427 Cleaning stop time 5 s 0 to 3600 s Set the stop time when the rotat...

Page 521: ...trigger to start cleaning operation As set in Pr 1471 cleaning operation is started when any of the applicable trigger conditions is satisfied The ON state at power ON or inverter reset is not regarded as a trigger Use Pr 150 and Pr 151 to set the detection level Refer to page 5 244 Use Pr 131 Pr 132 Pr 1143 and Pr 1144 to set the detection level When the frequency reflection is not provided for t...

Page 522: ...inary of the trigger factor into a decimal value and set the value in Pr 1471 Turning ON of X98 signal can be used as a trigger to start the cleaning operation For the X98 signal input set 98 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 to assign the function Pr 1471 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Decimal Binary 15 1111 14 1110 13 1101 12 1100 11 1011 10 1010 9 1001 8 1000 7 0111 6 0110 5 0101 4 0100 3 0011 2 0010 1 0001 ...

Page 523: ...operation canbefinished when the cleaning signal X97 is turned from ON to OFF For the X97 signal input set 97 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 to assign the function I003039E Fig 5 158 Starting conditions of the timer for a time trigger Pr 1470 setting X97 signal Cleaning operation Cleaning end condition Assignment ON OFF 0 Optional Optional Invalid Other than 0 Not assigned Enabled After cleaning is pe...

Page 524: ...nction output stop function Pr 522 restart at every start during cleaning When the stall prevention is activated during acceleration of the cleaning function the operation is shifted to the cleaning deceleration operation If the number of cleaning times set in Pr 1470 is an even number the operation is shifted to the normal operation after the cleaning forward reverse operation time Pr 1473 Pr 147...

Page 525: ...gral time is set though hunting is more likely to occur 9999 Without integral control 131 A601 PID upper limit 9999 0 to 100 Sets the upper limit The FUP signal is output when the feedback value exceeds this setting The maximum input 20 mA 5 V 10 V of the measured value terminal 4 is equivalent to 100 9999 No function 132 A602 PID lower limit 9999 0 to 100 Set the lower limit The FDN signal is out...

Page 526: ... input 103 Terminal 4 input 104 CC Link communication input 105 PLC function input 1015 A607 Integral stop selection at limited frequency 0 0 Integral stopped at limited frequency integral cleared during output interruption 1 Integral continued at limited frequency integral cleared during output interruption 10 Integral stopped at limited frequency integral stopped during output interruption 11 In...

Page 527: ...tial time 9999 0 01 to 10 s 9999 Refer to Pr 134 1140 A664 Second PID set point deviation input selection 2 1 to 5 Refer to Pr 609 1141 A665 Second PID measured value input selection 3 1to5 101to105 Refer to Pr 610 1143 A641 Second PID upper limit 9999 0 to 100 9999 Refer to Pr 131 1144 A642 Second PID lower limit 9999 0 to 100 9999 Refer to Pr 132 1145 A643 Second PID deviation limit 9999 0 to 10...

Page 528: ...together Kp 1 Td S 1 Ti S Set 0 to Pr 868 Terminal 1 function assignment When Pr 868 0 PID control is invalid Set point Deviation signal Kp Proportionality constant Ti Integral time S Operator Td Differential time Motor Manipulated variable Terminal 1 0 to 10 V DC 0 to 5 V Feedback signal measured value PID operation Inverter circuit To outside Kp 1 Td S 1 Ti S Note that the input of terminal 1 is...

Page 529: ...at incorporates the respec tive strengths of these actions Fig 5 162 Operation example for proportional changes of measured value I002687E NOTE PD action is the result of P and D actions being added together Fig 5 163 Operation example for proportional changes of measured value I002688E NOTE PID action is the result of all P I and D actions being added together Time Time Time PD action D action P ...

Page 530: ...ed andwhenthedeviationisaplusvalue themanipulatedamountisdecreased Relationship between deviation and manipulated amount output frequency I002690E Fig 5 164 Heating I002691E Fig 5 165 Cooling PID action setting Deviation Plus Minus Reverse action Forward action Tab 5 167 Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable X 0 X 0 Increase Heating Cold Hot Decrease Deviation Set point Measured...

Page 531: ... signal need not be input I002692E_G Fig 5 166 Connection diagram in source logic MCCB 0 R L1 S L2 T L3 STF STR RT X14 PC 10 2 5 4 U V W FUP FU FDN OL SE M P PID SU RL IPF 1 COM OUT Reverse action Pr 128 20 Pr 183 14 Pr 191 47 Pr 192 16 Pr 193 14 Pr 194 15 Power supply Forward rotation Reverse rotation PID control selection Setting Potentiometer Set point setting Inverter Motor Pump 2 wire type 3 ...

Page 532: ...ed value input Deviation input 0 Invalid PID invalid 10 Reverse action Terminal 1 11 Forward action 20 Reverse action Terminal 2 or Pr 133 Terminal 4 21 Forward action 50 Invalid Reverse action CC Link communication BACnet communication 51 Forward action 60 Reverse action CC Link communication BACnet communication CC Link communication BACnet communication 61 Forward action 70 Reverse action PLC f...

Page 533: ...tion 101 to 105 the square root of the input value is used as the measured value Setting value Command source Input method Pr 609 Pr 610 1 1 Terminal 1 Direct input 2 2 Terminal 2 3 3 Terminal 4 4 4 CC Link communication 5 5 PLC function 101 Terminal 1 Square root input 102 Terminal 2 103 Terminal 4 104 CC Link communication 105 PLC function Tab 5 169 Setting of Pr 609 and Pr 610 I003040E Fig 5 16...

Page 534: ...V 0 10 V 100 0 V 0 10 V 100 0 V 0 10 V 100 0 to 20 mA 0 mA 0 20 mA 100 0 mA 0 20 mA 100 0 V 0 20 mA 100 Terminal 1 0 to 5 V 5 V to 0 V 0 5 V 100 5 V to 0 V 0 5 V 100 5 V 100 0 V 0 5 V 100 When Pr 128 10 Pr 125 C2 to C4 When Pr 128 1000 C12 to C15 0 to 10 V 10 V to 0 V 0 10 V 100 10 V to 0 V 0 10 V 100 10 V 100 0 V 0 10 V 100 Terminal 4 0 to 5 V 0 V to 1 V 0 5 V 100 0 V to 1 V 0 5 V 100 0 V 20 1 V ...

Page 535: ...tion Pr 190 to Pr 196 setting value Description Positive logic Negative logic FUP PID upper limit 15 115 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr 131 PID upper limit Pr 1143 Second PID upper limit FUP2 Second PID upper limit 201 301 FDN PID lower limit 14 114 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr 132 PID lower limit Pr 1144 Second PID lower limit FDN2 Second PID lower limit 200 ...

Page 536: ...select the operation when the FUP FDN or Y48 signal is output and the operation when the sleep function is activated I001234E Fig 5 168 Automatic switchover to PID control Pr 554 setting Inverter operation At FUP signal FDN signal output At Y48 signal output At SLEEP operation start 0 Initial value Signal output only Signal output only Coasts to stop 1 Signal output output shutoff E PID 2 Signal o...

Page 537: ...tion stop restart at the signal output Pr 554 5 7 15 or 17 reverse action I003041 Fig 5 169 Example chart of protective function activation I003042E Fig 5 170 Example chart of deceleration stop restart E PID Pr 1370 Pr 1370 Pr 1370 Pr 1370 Pr 1370 Pr 1370 FUP FDN E PID Measured value Pr 1370 Output frequency Hz Time Upper limit level Pr 131 Pr 1143 Measured value Pr 1370 Pr 1370 ON Deceleration st...

Page 538: ...he PID output suspension function is released and PID control operation is automatically restarted Whether to allow motor to coast to a stop or perform a deceleration stop when SLEEP operation is started can be selected using Pr 554 While the PID output suspension function is activated the PID output interruption signal SLEEP is output During this time the inverter running signal RUN turns OFF and...

Page 539: ...D output sus pension function SLEEP function I002694E Fig 5 172 Output interruption SLEEP function NOTES The stirring function during the PID sleep prevents clogging of the pump while the SLEEP function is activated Refer to page 5 404 The PID sleep boost function maintains the sleep state for a long period of time Refer to page 5 404 Pr 1015 setting Operation at limited frequency Operation during...

Page 540: ...ue 67 PID measured value 2 0 1 0 to 100 Displays PID measured value even if PID control operating conditions are not satisfied while the PID control is enabled 0 is displayed at all times when PID control is based in deviation input 95 Second PID measured value 2 54 PID deviation 0 1 Settingnot available 100 to 100 900 to 1100 or 100 to 100 Using Pr 290 Monitor negative output selection minus valu...

Page 541: ... 129 to a larger value the integral time Pr 130 to a slightly longer time and the differential time Pr 134 to a slightly shorter time When performing operation first set the proportionalband Pr 129 toaslightlylarger value the integral time Pr 130 to a slightly longer time and the differential time Pr 134 to 9999 no function and while looking at the system operation decrease the proportional band P...

Page 542: ...ss terminals 4 and 5 Perform calibration by C6 Pr 904 Apply the input for example 20 mA of measured value 100 across terminals 4 and 5 Perform calibration by C7 Pr 905 The figure below shows the results of having performed the calibration above Example To enter the set point on terminal 2 NOTE When the set point is set at Pr 133 the setting frequency of C2 Pr 902 is equivalent to 0 and the setting...

Page 543: ... PID setting ON Second PID setting 10 First PID setting Tab 5 177 Selection of PID settings Classification First PID function parameters Second PID function parameters Pr Name Pr Name Parameter 127 PID control automatic switchover frequency 754 Second PID control automatic switchover frequency 128 PID action selection 753 Second PID action selection 129 PID proportional band 756 Second PID proport...

Page 544: ...6 Switchover mode Note that input to the terminal 1 is added to the terminals 2 and 4 inputs For example when Pr 128 20 or 21 the terminal 1 input is considered as a set point and added to the set point of the terminal 2 To use terminal 4 and 1 inputs in PID control set 0 initial value to Pr 858 Terminal 4 function assignment and Pr 868 Terminal 1 function assignment When a value other than 0 PID ...

Page 545: ...e sampling cycle 1 s 0 01 to 600 s Set the cycle for sampling of measurement values when using the step response method to perform the PID gain tuning 1214 A693 Timeout time after the maximum slope 10 s 1 to 9999 s Set the time after the measurement of the maximum slope until the completion of the tuning when using the step response method to perform the PID gain tuning 1215 A694 Limit cycle outpu...

Page 546: ...en applied the constant used before PID gain tuning when a fault occurs Limit cycle method In the limit cycle method the two position ON OFF operation is performed three times for output ofthemanipulatedamountfortherealsystem Fromthevibrationwaveformdataofthemeasured values the vibration amplitude Xc and the vibration cycle Tc are measured Based on the measured values each constant is determined I...

Page 547: ...imit of the output Pr 1216 1000 Using measured value set point hysteresis Pr 1217 Manipulated amount Lower limit of the output Pr 1216 1000 Using measured value set point hysteresis Pr 1217 Manipulated amount Upper limit of the output Pr 1215 1000 Forward action When measured value set point Manipulated amount Lower limit of the output Pr 1216 1000 When measured value set point Manipulated amount ...

Page 548: ...ng PID gain tuning with the step response method When the measured values are unstable the tuning result may not be accurate Accurate measurement of the maximum slope may not be achieved if the Pr 1213 setting is small in the step response method Pr 1218 setting value Target PID Tuning method Control adjustment method 0 initial value PID gain tuning function disabled 100 First PID Step response me...

Page 549: ...ing setting Select the PID gain tuning operation 1211 PID gain tuning timeout time Set the timeout time for PID gain tuning A timeout error occurs when the elapsed time exceeds the setting 1212 Step manipulated amount Set the step manipulated amount for PID gain tuning 1213 Step response sampling cycle Set the cycle for sampling of measurement values for PID gain tuning 1214 Timeout time after the...

Page 550: ...5 183 PID gain tuning status monitor Pr Name Step response method Limit cycle method P control PI control PID control PI control PID control 129 756 PID 130 757 PID integral 134 758 PID differential time The calculation result is applied 9999 is set Tab 5 184 Automatically set parameters after completion of PID gain tuning NOTES By PID gain tuning the settings of the PID constant parameters Pr 129...

Page 551: ...ate 93 Timeout error Tuning is not terminated within the time set in Pr 1211 after the start of PID gain tuning Change the Pr 1211 setting as appropriate 94 Calculation error The tuning calculation is inconsistent In the step response method change the Pr 1212 and Pr 1213 settings as appropriate In the limit cycle method change the Pr 1217 setting as appropriate 95 Setting error PID control is dis...

Page 552: ...gral time Pr 130 or Pr 757 Smaller integral effect Optimal Response is low Decrease the proportional band Pr 129 or Pr 756 Larger proportional effect Decrease the integral time Pr 130 or Pr 757 Larger integral effect Tab 5 186 Adjustment methods after completion of PID gain tuning NOTE When the differential operation is used adjust the differential time Pr 134 or Pr 758 while check ing the stabili...

Page 553: ...r 935 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 759 A600 PID unit selection 0 0 to 43 Change the PID control related display unit that is displayed on the LCD operation panel FR LU08 or the parameter unit FR PU07 9999 Without display unit switching C42 A630 934 PID display bias coefficient 9999 0 to 500 Set the coefficient of the bias side minimum of measured value input 9999 Displayed in C4...

Page 554: ...sitive value even though a positive negative deviation is given Pr 934 PID bias coefficient Pr 935 PID gain coefficient To perform a reverse action set Pr 128 PID action selection to forward action Alternatively to perform a forward action set Pr 128 to reverse action I002699E Fig 5 178 PID bias and gain NOTE Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage current input specification with Pr...

Page 555: ...hutoff release at deviation of 40 or higher set Pr 577 960 Pr Name Pr Name 131 PID upper limit 1143 Second PID upper limit 132 PID lower limit 1144 Second PID lower limit 133 PID action set point 755 Second PID action set point 553 PID deviation limit 1145 Second PID deviation limit 577 Output interruption cancel level 1149 Second output interruption cancel level 761 Pre charge ending level 766 Se...

Page 556: ...h 27 lbM Pound per Minute 5 MPa Mega Pascal 28 lbS Pound per Second 6 kPa Kilo Pascal 29 iWC Inch Water Column 7 Pa Pascal 30 iWG Inch Water Gauge 8 bar Bar 31 fWG Feet of Water Gauge 9 mbr Millibar 32 mWG Meter of Water Gauge 10 GPH Gallon per Hour 33 iHg Inches of Mercury 11 GPM Gallon per Minute 34 mHg Millimeters of Mercury 12 GPS Gallon per Second 35 kgH Kilograms per Hour 13 L H Liter per Ho...

Page 557: ...e fault occurs when the measured value exceeds the setting during pre charging 9999 Without pre charge upper limit level 764 A620 Pre charge time limit 9999 0 to 3600 s Set the time limit for the pre charged amount A pre charge fault occurs when the pre charge time exceeds the setting 9999 Without pre charge time limit 1132 A626 Pre charge change increment amount 9999 0 to 100 Set the change incre...

Page 558: ... charge ending conditions are as follows When two or more ends conditions are satisfied the pre charge operation ends by the first satisfied condition Pr 127 setting Pre charge ending condition setting Pre charge function Valid pre charge ending condition Pr 761 setting Pr 762 setting X77 signal 9999 Disabled Other than 9999 9999 9999 Not assigned Assigned Enabled X77 Other than 9999 Not assigned ...

Page 559: ...increment amount of the set point equals the Pr 1132 setting after the automatic switchover frequency is reached until the pre charge ending condition is satisfied Although PID control is performed after the automatic switcho ver frequency is reached until the pre charge ends the status is regarded as the one during pre charge I002702E Fig 5 179 Pre charge ending level Pr 761 9999 Pr 1132 9999 I00...

Page 560: ...77 signal to OFF after checking that the during pre charge oper ation signal Y49 is OFF When the PID output suspension SLEEP function is in use and PID control is to be performed immediately after this function is released leave the X77 signal ON until PID control ends When the pre charge operation is valid the pre charge operation is performed at the output shut off cancellation MRS signal etc Th...

Page 561: ...d the Pre charge level over Y53 signal is output For the Y51 signal set 51 positive logic or 151 negative logic to Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection and for the Y53 signal set 53 positive logic or 153 negative logic in Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the functions to terminals Example of protective function by time limit Pr 760 0 NOTES For Pr 764 Pre...

Page 562: ...nction measured value limit Pr 760 1 I002705E Fig 5 184 Reaching of pre charge limit by the measured amount STF Y49 Y53 ALM E PCH Measured value PSI When Pr 760 1 output is shut off after the motor decelerates to a stop Time Time Pr 127 Pr 763 Output frequency Hz 0 Hz ...

Page 563: ...evel 768 Second pre charge upper detection level 764 Pre charge time limit 769 Second pre charge time limit 1132 Pre charge change increment amount 1133 Second pre charge change increment amount Tab 5 191 Parameters for setting multiple PID pre charge functions Classification First pre charge function parameters Second pre charge function parameters Signal Name Signal Name Input signal X77 Pre cha...

Page 564: ... to 3600 s Used to increase the output frequency of the inverter when a motor connection occurs Set the acceleration time for increasing the output frequency 9999 The output frequency is not increased when a motor connection occurs 584 A406 Auxiliary motor 1 starting frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency to start the auxiliary motor 585 A407 Auxiliary motor 2 starting frequency 60 Hz...

Page 565: ...stablished MCs between the inverter and the motor and the power supply and the motor are switched to change the operation of the motor driven by the inverter to commercial power supply operation and the next motor is started by the inverter When conditions to stop motors are established while auxiliary motors are running the motor started first currently driven by the commercial power supply is st...

Page 566: ...cial power supply The starting order of motors is M2 M3 M1 if the previous order was M1 M2 M3 The motor starts in the order of elapsed time after completion of the previous inverter driven operation from the longest to the shortest The motor that has not been driven by the inverter for the longest time starts first Qmax Pr 579 0 Motor 1 M1 Motor 2 M2 Motor 3 M3 Motor 4 M4 Pr 579 1 Motor 1 M1 Motor...

Page 567: ...ction There is no need to input AU signal I003052E_C Fig 5 186 Connection diagram multi pump function basic system RST UVW RT X14 10 2 5 1 4 RO2 FU RO3 OL RO4 IPF SE MC RO2 0 24V RO4 RO3 RO2 MC M1 STF STR JOG X64 M4 M3 M2 MC RO4 MC RO3 PC Source logic Pr 183 14 Pr 185 64 Pr 194 72 Pr 193 73 Pr 194 74 Distributed water Pump 4 Pump 3 Pump 2 Pump 1 Supplied water For 2 wire type Detector 24 V DC Powe...

Page 568: ...ly in accordance with the power supply specifications of the detector I003053E_C Fig 5 187 Connection diagram multi pump function alternative system direct system alternative direct system RST UVW JOG X64 10 2 5 1 4 RIO1 FU RO1 OL RIO2 IPF SE MC RIO1 RO2 SU RIO3 RUN RO3 1A 1C RIO4 2A 2C RO4 3A 3C RO1 MC STF STR FR A8AR RIO1 RO2 RIO2 RO3 RIO3 RO4 RIO4 RT X14 RO1 RIO2 RO2 RIO3 MC RO3 RIO4 RO4 M1 M2 ...

Page 569: ...le The value cannot be set in Pr 320 to Pr 322 Negative logic cannot be set Output signal Pr 190toPr 196andPr 320toPr 322settings Function Positive logic Negative logic SLEEP 70 170 PID output interruption RO1 71 Commercial power supply side motor 1 connection RO1 RO2 72 Commercial power supply side motor 2 connection RO2 RO3 73 Commercial power supply side motor 3 connection RO3 RO4 74 Commercial...

Page 570: ... Pr 584 Auxiliary motor 1 starting frequency Variation Pr 584 Pr 587 Relay output ON OFF Flow When the number of motors increases Pr 590 Auxiliary motor start detection time Pr 591 Auxiliary motor stop detection time When the number of motors decreases Relay output ON OFF Minimum frequency Pr 587 Auxiliary motor 1 stopping frequency Output frequency Maximum frequency Pr 584 Auxiliary motor 1 start...

Page 571: ... Pr 584 to Pr 586 Pr 590 Use Pr 584 to Pr 586 to set the output frequency of the inverter at which the commercial power supply operation motors are started When output frequency equals to or higher than the setting continues for longer than the time set in Pr 590 Auxiliary motor start detection time auxiliary motors driven by the commercial power supply are started Tosetthestartingfrequency usePr ...

Page 572: ...ic system STF STR RO3 RO2 RO4 M2 M1 M3 M4 SLEEP Pr 587 Pr 587 Pr 589 Pr 589 Pr 588 Pr 588 Pr 126 Pr 126 Pr 126 Commercial power supply operation Inverter operation Commercial power supply operation Commercial power supply operation Pr 126 Pr 590 Pr 590 Pr 590 Pr 126 Pr 126 Pr 584 Pr 585 Pr 586 Pr 591 Pr 591 Pr 591 Pr 575 Pr 589 Pr 588 Pr 587 Pr 576 C2 902 C2 902 C2 902 ...

Page 573: ...575 Pr 125 Pr 125 Pr 584 Pr 584 C2 Pr 902 C2 Pr 902 Pr 587 Pr 587 Pr 576 Pr 576 Pr 125 Pr 125 Pr 584 Pr 584 Pr 590 Pr 590 Commercial power supply operation Inverter operation Pr 590 Pr 576 Pr 590 Pr 125 Pr 584 C2 902 Inverter operation Commercial power supply operation Pr 125 Pr 575 Pr 584 Pr 591 Pr 587 RIO1 RIO2 RO1 RO2 M1 M2 r 590 r 581 r 580 r 125 Commercial power supply operation Inverter oper...

Page 574: ... off When the MRS signal is turned ON during operation the inverter output is shut off and the run ning motors coast to a stop Although the motor with the longest operating time of the commer cial power supply operation is switched to the inverter operation after elapse of time set in Pr 591 Auxiliary motor stop detection time the output shutoff status remains When the MRS signal is turned OFF the...

Page 575: ...tion After the auxiliary motor is stopped the motor operation does not start while the PID measured value is equal to Pr 1376 setting or more even when the auxiliary motor starting condition is satisfied NOTES The PID overpressure control function can be used when PID control is performed reverse action only by the set point or measured value input using the multi pump function Either the first or...

Page 576: ... completion frequency 9999 0 to 120 Hz Set the frequency at which the check valve deceleration stops 9999 The check valve deceleration function is disabled 1370 A442 Detection time for PID limiting operation 0 s 0 to 900 s Set the time from when the measured value input exceeds the Pr 131 or Pr 132 setting until the FUP or FDN signal is output 1371 A443 PID upper lower limit pre warning level rang...

Page 577: ...lt operation selection 0 0 The protective function E PID for the input pressure fault is activated 1 A deceleration stop is performed when the input pressure fault occurs I003061E Fig 5 195 PID output hold NOTES While the PID output is held calculation is not performed for the P term I term and D term For the P and I terms the values at the start of the holding period are kept The D term is set to...

Page 578: ... M3 M4 and the next starting order of motors is M2 M3 M4 M1 stirring operation during the sleep will be applied to the M2 motor When the auxiliary motor starting condition is satisfied by the stirring operation during the sleep while the multi pump function is used the stirring operation continues The auxiliary motor does not start I003062E Fig 5 196 Stirring function during PID sleep Stirring fre...

Page 579: ...inverter reset by a protective function activation the prim ing operation is performed When the inverter is restarted by the retry operation at a fault occurrence the priming pump oper ation is continued and after the restart the PID control operation is performed without waiting for the priming time When the control switches between the first PID control and second PID control during the prim ing...

Page 580: ... set 226 positive logic or 326 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function I003064E Fig 5 198 PID auxiliary pressure pump function NOTES The recommended settings of Pr 577 Pr 1149 Pr 1374 and Pr 1375 are as follows Pr 577 Pr 1149 Pr 1374 Pr 1375 Even when the inverter emergency stop operation output shutoff by the MRS signal etc is per formed...

Page 581: ... Sleep boost waiting time the sleep function is activated Then the set point returns to its original value from the sleep boost set point When the measured value does not reach to the sleep boost set point after the time set in Pr 1367 passes PID control continues without activating the sleep function When the deviation remains at the Pr 577 setting or higher for the time set in Pr 1368 Output int...

Page 582: ...s output Also the set point is changed by the amount set in Pr 1372 PID measured value control set point change amount Set the rate s for changing the set point by the Pr 1372 setting value in Pr 1373 PID measured value control set point change rate When the measured value falls within the normal range the set point returns to its original value For the Y219 and Y220 signals assign the functions t...

Page 583: ...d second PID control while the set point is changed by the Pr 1372 setting value or while the Y219 Y220 signal is output the set point returns to its original value When the upper limit or lower limit is disabled Pr 131 or Pr 132 9999 the upper lower limit pre warning function is not activated FUP FDN Y219 Y220 Pr 1370 Pr 1370 Pr 1370 Pr 1370 Pr 1370 Pr 1370 Measured value ON Measured value ON ON ...

Page 584: ...or Pr 43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation FU signal ON for the time set in Pr 1370 Detection time for PID limiting operation For the DRY signal set 228 positive logic or 328 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function The PID dry run monitoring function is enabled for the reverse action I003068E Fig 5 202 PID dry run monitoring...

Page 585: ...re starts and the PID input pressure fault signal Y230 is output Select the operation for the abnormal input pressure in Pr 1381 For the Y229 and Y230 signals assign the functions to output terminals using the Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection To monitor the input pressure set 69 in the monitor selection parameters 0 1 increments Pr 1377 setting Pressure input terminal Remarks 1 ...

Page 586: ... pressure control function and the PID sleep boost function are used simulta neously each function may change the set point When the set point change is attempted by both functions the change by the PID input pressure control function has priority The sleep state is established without applying the set point change by the PID sleep boost function Y229 Y230 Pr 1370 Pr 1370 Pr 1370 Pr 1370 Pr 1370 P...

Page 587: ...1 Reduced voltage start at every start no frequency search 13 Frequency search at every start reduced impact restart 299 A701 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting 9999 0 Without rotation direction 1 With rotation direction 9999 When Pr 78 0 with rotation direction When Pr 78 1 2 without rotation direction 57 A702 Restart coasting time 9999 0 Coasting time differs according to the i...

Page 588: ...signal CS is assigned to the input terminal by setting Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection restart operation is enabled at turn ON of the CS signal When the CS signal is assigned to an input terminal and Pr 57 Restart coasting time 9999 with restart the inverter cannot be operated while the CS signal remains OFF Separated converter types detect the instantaneous power failure on the...

Page 589: ...act input specification is selected in the initial setting Set Pr 599 0 to change the input specification to NO contact Fig 5 206 Connecting the signals X10 X11 CS I002850E_G NOTES Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 may affect other functions Set param eters after confirming the function of each terminal If the CS signal is not assigned to any input terminal solely setting Pr ...

Page 590: ...the following operation is performed according to the Pr 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection setting By setting 3 13 in Pr 162 the restart can be made smoother with even less impact than when 0 2 10 12 is set in Pr 162 When the inverter is restarted with 3 13 set to Pr 162 offline auto tuning is required For details on offline auto tuning of Advanced magnetic flux vector control refer to page...

Page 591: ... detection during a restart the speed might drop if the moment of inertia J of the load is small If reverse operation is detected when 1 reverse rotation disabled is set to Pr 78 operation decelerates by reverse rotation and then changes to forward rotation when the start command is forward rotation The inverter does not restart when the start command is reverse rotation When 3 13 is set to Pr 162...

Page 592: ...ng I002714E Fig 5 208 Automatic restart without frequency search Pr 162 1 11 NOTE This restart method uses the output frequency that was active before the instantaneous power failure stored in memory If the instantaneous power failure time is 0 2 s or more the output fre quency can no longer be stored and held in memory so the restart is performed from Pr 13 Start ing frequency initial value is 1 ...

Page 593: ...selection 25 to 3 s or more Restart cushion time Pr 58 The cushion time is the time takes to raise the voltage to the level required for the specified speed after the motor speed detection output frequency before instantaneous power failure when Pr 162 1 or 11 Normally the motor runs at the initial value as it is However adjust to suit the moment of inertia J of the load or the size of the torque ...

Page 594: ...ut signals become invalid The SU and FU signals are not output during the restart These signals are output after the restart cushion time passes Restart operation is also performed after the inverter reset is released or after the retry by the retry function occurs E CAUTION Provide a mechanical interlock for MC1 and MC2 The inverter will be damaged if power supply is input to the inverter output ...

Page 595: ... 2 positive logic or 102 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection the IPF signal can be assigned to another terminal When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected motor driving is resumed at the power restoration after an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage E IPF and E UVT are not activated Pr Name Initial value Settin...

Page 596: ...et parameters after confirming the function of each terminal If the CS signal is not assigned to any input terminal solely setting Pr 57 will enable the restart operation at all times If the restart operation is selected instantaneous power failure protection E IPF is disabled while the fault output signal is output at an instantaneous power failure The SU and FU signals are not output during the ...

Page 597: ...9 it is recommended to also use the regenerative avoidance function Pr 882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection 1 to make startups stable If the overvoltage protective function E OV still occurs with the regeneration avoidance function also use the retry function Pr 67 During PM motor control the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function oper ates only when an MM EFS MM TH...

Page 598: ...ch 9999 Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi motor SF PR SF JR SF HR SF JRCA SF HRCA MM EFS MM THE4 and so on 560 A712 Second frequency search gain 9999 0 to 32767 The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for the frequency search of the second motor 9999 Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi motor SF PR SF JR SF HR SF JRCA SF HRCA MM EFS MM THE4 and so on 96 C110 Auto tuning s...

Page 599: ...to tuning Pr 96 Auto tuning setting status 11 so either firmly secure the motor by the mechanical brake or check to see if turning the motor will cause any safety problems Attention is required for lifts in particular The motor turning slightly will not affect tuning performance Offline auto tuning is not performed correctly when the surge voltage suppression filter FR ASF H FR BMF H and sine wave...

Page 600: ...g the start signal STF signal or STR signal OFF also ends tuning During offline auto tuning only the following I O signals are valid initial value Input terminals valid signals STP STOP OH MRS RT RES STF STR S1 and S2 Output terminals RUN OL IPF FM CA AM A1B1C1 and SO When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM CA and AM the progress status of offline auto tuning...

Page 601: ...ollowing parameters Status Operation panel FR DU08 display LCD operation panel FR LU08 display Setting Tuning in progress Normal end Tab 5 206 Display during tuning monitor display Parameter Name 90 Motor constant R1 298 Frequency search gain 96 Auto tuning setting status Tab 5 207 Set parameters NOTE The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their d...

Page 602: ...verter protective function operation Make the setting again 91 The current limit stall prevention function is activated Set the acceleration deceleration time longer Set Pr 156 Stall prevention operation selection 1 92 The converter output voltage fell to 75 of the rated value Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation 93 Calculation error The motor is not connected Check the motor wiring and ...

Page 603: ...he RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to another terminal Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal E CAUTION Note that the motor may start ...

Page 604: ...r decelerates from the output frequency Pr 262 264 A733 Power failure deceleration time 1 5 s 0 to 3600 Set the slope applicable from the deceleration start to the Pr 266 set frequency 265 A734 Power failure deceleration time 2 9999 0 to 3600 Set the slope applicable for the frequency range starting at Pr 266 and downward 9999 Same as Pr 264 266 A735 Power failure deceleration time switchover freq...

Page 605: ...erter type terminals P and R1 L11 and terminals N and S1 L21 are connected For the separated converter type connect the terminal to which PWF signal of the converter unit is assigned and the terminal to which X48 signal of the inverter is assigned Also set Pr 261 of the converter unit in accordance with the inverter setting Refer to the Instruction Manual of the converter unit I002875E_G Fig 5 213...

Page 606: ...ge and power failure Set Pr 261 to select the action at an undervoltage and power failure I001173E Fig 5 214 Parameters for stop selection at power failure Pr 261 Setting Action at undervoltage and power failure Power restoration during deceleration at occurrence of power failure Deceleration stop time Undervoltage avoidance function 0 Coasts to stop Coasts to stop 1 Deceleration stop Deceleration...

Page 607: ...ration to stop function is set enabled Pr 261 1 11 or 21 the power failure time deceleration to stop function is disabled When the power failure time deceleration to stop function is enabled Pr 261 1 11 21 the inverter will not start even if the power is turned ON or inverter reset is performed with the start signal STR STF ON Turn OFF the start signal once and then ON again to make a start Power ...

Page 608: ...tiontimeisadjusted shortened topreventanundervoltage from occurring during deceleration at occurrence of power failure Adjust the downward frequency slope and the response level using Pr 294 UV avoidance voltage gain Setting a large value improves the response to the bus voltage I002720E Fig 5 216 Operation continuation at instantaneous power failure IPF Y46 Y46 When power is restored during decel...

Page 609: ...al of the converter unit is assigned and the terminal to which X48 signal of the inverter is assigned In the initial setting X48 signal is used with the normally closed NC contact input specification Use Pr 606 Power failure stop external signal input selection to change the specification to the normally open NO contact input To use the X48 signal set 48 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal f...

Page 610: ...he power supply is turned OFF This is not a fault When the power failure time deceleration to stop function is selected undervoltage protection E UVT instantaneous power failure protection E IPF and input phase loss protection E ILF are not invalid When the load is high during PM motor control an undervoltage sometimes causes the inverter to coast to a stop Changing the terminal assignment using P...

Page 611: ...01 5 0 0001 When the pulse train is input from terminal JOG the number of sampled pulses can be converted The result of conversion is stored to SD1236 Number of sampled pulses input pulse value per count cycle pre scale setting value Pr 417 unit scale factor Pr 416 417 A803 Pre scale setting value 1 0 to 32767 Pre scale setting value 498 A804 PLC function flash memory clear 0 0 9696 0 to 9999 0 Cl...

Page 612: ...nction selection to assign the function to a terminal When 1 is set in Pr 415 Inverter operation lock mode setting the inverter can be operated only when the sequence program is running By changing the PLC program status from RUN to STOP during inverter operation the motor decelerates to stop To stop the inverter operation at the STOP status of the PLC program while performing auto operation using...

Page 613: ...age 2 68 for an outline of the USB communication function I002722E Fig 5 218 Copying the PLC function project data to USB memory Monitor mode Parameter setting mode Function mode Faults history mode USB memory mode Project data file number displays 1 to 99 unrelated to the number of files saved in the USB memory device Overwrite the inverter project data file onto the designated file in the USB me...

Page 614: ...ted Supported DAT Project management information Supported Not available TXT Copy information Supported Not available Tab 5 212 Data that can be copied NOTE If the project data of the PLC function is locked with a password using FR Configurator2 copying to the USB memory device and verification are disabled Also if set to write disabled writing to the inverter is disabled For the details of the PL...

Page 615: ...l trigger 3 Analog or digital trigger OR logic 4 Both analog and digital trigger AND logic 1026 A906 Number of sampling before trigger 90 0 to 100 Set the percentage of the pre trigger sampling time with respect to the overall sampling time 1027 A910 Analog source selection 1ch 201 1 to 3 5 to 14 17 18 20 23 24 34 40 to 42 52 to 54 61 62 64 67 to 69 81to96 98 201 to 213 230 to 232 237 238 Select t...

Page 616: ...l source selection 4ch 4 1042 A934 Digital source selection 5ch 5 1043 A935 Digital source selection 6ch 6 1044 A936 Digital source selection 7ch 7 1045 A937 Digital source selection 8ch 8 1046 A938 Digital trigger channel 1 1 to 8 Select the digital channel to be the trigger 1047 A939 Digital trigger operation selection 0 0 Trace starts when the signal turns ON 1 Trace starts when the signal turn...

Page 617: ...M on the inverter If automatic transfer is set the trace data in internal RAM is transferred to USB memory device when the trigger is being generated Data can be transferred to a USB memory device as long as data is held in internal RAM Trace data in internal RAM is cleared when the power supply is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset 1 Memory mode automatic transfer 2 Recorder mode In this mo...

Page 618: ...d variable 11 Output current peak value 92 Second PID set point 12 Converter output voltage peak value 93 Second PID measured value 13 Input power 94 Second PID deviation 14 Output power 95 Second PID measured value 2 17 Load meter 96 Second PID manipulated variable 18 Motor excitation current 98 Control circuit temperature 20 Cumulative energization time 65535 201 Output frequency high speed Pr 8...

Page 619: ...00167 3 7K 11 00083 3 7K 6 10940 500K 866 00250 5 5K 17 5 00126 5 5K 9 12120 560K 962 00340 7 5K 24 00170 7 5K 12 00490 11K 33 00250 11K 17 00630 15K 46 00310 15K 23 00770 18 5K 61 00380 18 5K 31 00930 22K 76 00470 22K 38 01250 30K 90 00620 30K 44 01540 37K 115 00770 37K 57 01870 45K 145 00930 45K 71 02330 55K 175 01160 55K 86 03160 75K 215 01800 75K 110 03800 90K 288 02160 90K 144 04750 110K 346 ...

Page 620: ...3 DO2 10 STP STOP 124 DO3 11 RES 125 DO4 12 CS 126 DO5 21 X0 For the details of the signals refer to the Instruction Manual of FR A8AX option 127 DO6 22 X1 128 RA1 For the details of the signals refer to the Instruction Manual of FR A8AR option 23 X2 129 RA2 24 X3 130 RA3 25 X4 26 X5 27 X6 28 X7 29 X8 30 X9 31 X10 32 X11 33 X12 34 X13 35 X14 36 X15 37 DY Tab 5 217 Digital source monitored item sel...

Page 621: ... be transferred during sampling To automatically start sampling when the power supply is turned ON or at a recovery after an inverter reset set 1 to Pr 1024 Sampling auto start Pr 1036 setting Trigger generation conditions Trigger level setting 0 Sampling starts when the analog data targeted for the trigger exceeds the value specified at the trigger level Set the trigger level by Pr 1037 400 to 40...

Page 622: ...ingONandOFF respectively To input the TRG signal set 46 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection and to input the TRC signal set 47 to assign the function to a terminal I002724E Fig 5 220 Selection of the trace mode settings NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirmi...

Page 623: ...g the trace status Monitor value Trace status 1000s place 100s place 10s place 1s place 0 or no display No trace data in internal RAM USB memory not accessed Trigger not detected Trace stopped 1 Trace data in internal RAM USB memory being accessed Trigger detected Trace operation 2 USB memory transfer error 3 USB buffer overrun Tab 5 222 Trace status LED status Operating status OFF No USB connecti...

Page 624: ...tion specification P N002 P N030 P N031 P N034 P N080 Pr 539 Pr 331 Pr 332 Pr 334 Pr 343 5 488 BACnet MS TP protocol P N030 P N031 P N050 to P N054 Pr 331 Pr 332 Pr 390 Pr 726 to Pr 729 5 506 To communicate via Ethernet connector FR F800 E Initial setting of Ethernet communication P N600 to P N603 P N610 to P N613 P N630 to P N632 P N641 to P N644 P N650 P N651 P N660 to P N666 P N670 to P N675 Pr...

Page 625: ...er Name Description 1 SG Earth ground connected to terminal 5 2 Operation panel power supply 3 RDA Inverter receive 4 SDB Inverter send 5 SDA Inverter send 6 RDB Inverter receive 7 SG Earth ground connected to terminal 5 8 Operation panel power supply Tab 5 224 PU connector terminal description NOTES Pins No 2 and 8 provide power to the operation panel or parameter unit Do not use these pins durin...

Page 626: ...or FR ADP option PU connector Inverter RJ 45 connector Communication cable RS 485 interface terminals RJ 45 connector Computer Station 0 Inverter PU connector RS 232C cable Maximum 15 m RS 232C connector Computer Station 0 Inverter PU connector RS 232C RS 485 converter RJ 45 connector Communication cable RJ 45 connector Communication cable SDB SDA RDB RDA FG SG CSB CSA RSB RSA RDB RDA SDB SDA SG C...

Page 627: ...he manufacturer Refer to the following table when fabricating the cable on the user side Commercially available products as of February 2015 Do not use pins No 2 and 8 of the communication cable I002384E Fig 5 225 RS 485 terminals layout Model Manufacturer Interface embedded cable DAFXIH CAB D SUB25P for personal computer side DAFXIH CABV D SUB9P for personal computer side Connector conversion cab...

Page 628: ... mA SG GND Earthing grounding connected to terminal SD Tab 5 225 RS 485 terminal description NOTES To avoid malfunction keep the RS 485 terminal wires away from the control circuit board When the FR F820 01250 30K or lower or the FR F840 00620 30K or lower is used with a plug in option lead the wires through the hole on the side face of the front cover for wiring of the RS 485 terminals When the F...

Page 629: ...nterface terminals Twisted pair cable Converter Twisted pair cable Set the terminating resistor switch to the 100 position RS 485 terminals RS 485 interface terminals RS 232C cable Computer Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Station 0 Station 1 Station n Inverter Inverter Inverter RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals Inverter Inve...

Page 630: ...on to several inverter NOTE For branching connect the wires as shown below I002733E Fig 5 230 2 wire type connection NOTE A program should be created so that transmission is disabled receiving state when the computer is not sending and reception is disabled sending state during sending to prevent the computer from receiving its own data 1 RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA SG RSB CSA CSB FG SG SG SG SG SG 2 SDB1...

Page 631: ...es the error reset function in any operation mode 1 Enables the error reset function only in the Network operation mode 500 N011 Communication error execution waiting time 0 s 0 to 999 8 s Set the time from when the communication line error occurs until the inverter starts the operation for the communication error when a communication option is used 501 N012 Communication error occurrence count di...

Page 632: ...tection function selection 3 or Pr 1432 Ethernet communication check time interval 9999 during Ethernet communication When a communication error is detected while communication with the RS 485 terminals is performed thealarm LF signalisoutputto anoutputterminaloftheinverter TousetheLFsignal set 98 positive logic or 198 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to...

Page 633: ...l value Coasts to stop E SER E EHR ON Stop status continues E SER E EHR ON 1 Deceleration stop E SER after stop E EHR after stop ON after stop 2 OFF Automatic restart function Normal display OFF 3 Operation continued at the set frequency of Pr 779 Normal display OFF Normal operation Normal display OFF 4 CF OFF Communication option itself When a communication option is used 0 3 Coasts to stop E 1 O...

Page 634: ...FF OFF OFF Time Time Time Time Decelerates to stop Motor coasting Motor coasting Fault occurrence Fault removal Fault removal Fault removal Fault occurrence Fault occurrence Fault display E SER Fault output ALM Fault display E SER Fault output ALM Communication fault Pr 502 setting 2 Pr 502 setting 3 Communication fault Communication fault Fault display E SER Fault output ALM Display Display Fault...

Page 635: ...nitor and the faults history goes back to the previous status If Pr 502 0 the normal deceleration time setting settings like Pr 8 Pr 44 and Pr 45 is applied as the deceleration time Normal acceleration time setting settings like Pr 7 and Pr 44 is applied as the acceleration time for restart When Pr 502 2 3or 4 the inverter operates with the start command and the speed command which were used befor...

Page 636: ...ion error occurs and Pr 502 becomes invalid For FR F800 E If the communication error setting is disabled with the settings of Pr 502 3 and Pr 1432 9999 the inverter does not continue its operation at the frequency set in Pr 779 when a communication error occurs If the communication error setting is disabled with Pr 502 3 or 4 Pr 335 9999 and Pr 539 9999 the inverter does not continue its operation...

Page 637: ...Communication error occurrence count display is incremented by 1 I003084E Fig 5 233 Recognition of a communication error depending on Pr 500 setting NOTES The communication option error E 1 is not included in the targets of Pr 500 Operations at communication error occurrences can be selected with Pr 502 Stop mode selec tion at communication error Refer to page 5 460 I003085E Fig 5 234 Communicatio...

Page 638: ...Pr 349 setting Description 0 initial value Error reset is enabled independently of operation mode 1 Error reset is enabled only in the network operation mode Tab 5 228 Pr 349 settings NOTES Change of the Pr 340 setting is valid when powering on or resetting the inverter Pr 340 can be changed with the operation panel independently of the operation mode When setting a value other than 0 in Pr 340 ma...

Page 639: ...eed For example if 192 is set the communication speed is 19200 bps N022 PU communication data length 0 0 Data length 8 bits 1 Data length 7 bits N023 PU communication stop bit length 1 0 Stop bit length 1 bit 1 Stop bit length 2 bits 119 PU communication stop bit length data length 1 0 Stop bit length 1 bit Data length 8 bits 1 Stop bit length 2 bits 10 Stop bit length 1 bit Data length 7 bits 11 ...

Page 640: ...0 to 10 9999 Set the permissible number of retries for unsuccessful data reception Same specifications as Pr 121 336 N036 RS 485 communication check time interval 0 s 0 RS 485 communication is available but the inverter trips in the NET operation mode 0 1 to 999 8 s Set the interval of the communication check signal loss detection time Same specifications as Pr 122 9999 No communication check sign...

Page 641: ...f is not sent subsequent communication is made properly Item Description Related Parameter Communication protocol Mitsubishi protocol computer link Pr 551 Conforming standard EIA 485 RS 485 Connectable units 1 N maximum 32 units setting is 0 to 31 stations Pr 117 Pr 331 Communication Speed PU connector Selected among 4800 9600 19200 38400 bps Pr 118 RS 485 terminals Selected among 300 600 1200 240...

Page 642: ...m the inverter to the inverter reset request can be selected Refer to page 5 481 At mode error and data range error C1 data contains an error code Refer to page 5 487 Except for those errors the error is returned with data format D Symbol Operation Operation command Operation frequency Multi command Parameter write Inverter reset Monitor Parameter read Communication request is sent to the inverter...

Page 643: ...arriage return and LF line feed are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers In this case settingmustbealsomadeontheinverteraccordingtothecomputer WhethertheCRandLFcodes will be present or absent can be selected using Pr 124 and Pr 341 CR LF selection Format Number of characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 A ENQ Inverter station No Instruction code Data Su...

Page 644: ...carriage return and LF line feed are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers In this case settingmustbealsomadeontheinverteraccordingtothecomputer WhethertheCRandLFcodes will be present or absent can be selected using Pr 124 or Pr 341 CR LF selection Format Number of characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B ENQ Inverter stationNo Instruction code Sum check Format Number of characters ...

Page 645: ...the transmission of reply data Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer in the range of 0 to 150 ms in 10 ms increments For example 1 10 ms 2 20 ms Signal name ASCII Code Description STX H02 Start Of Text Start of data ETX H03 End Of Text End of data ENQ H05 Inquiry Communication request ACK H06 Acknowledge No data error detected LF H0A Line Feed CR H0D Carriage Re...

Page 646: ...41 H44 H46 H34 H30 H31 H45 H31 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H1F4 STX 0 1 1 7 0 3 0 H02 H30 H31 H37 H31 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30 ETX 7 H30 H31 H31 H37 H37 H30 H130 Example 1 Computer Inverter ASCII Code Station number Station number Computer Inverter Example 2 ASCII Code Instruction code Data read Data Sum check code Sum check code Sum WhenthePr 123orPr 337 Waitingtimesetting 9999 createthecommunicationrequest d...

Page 647: ...n error New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter completes receiving the preceding data H6 H7 Character error The character received is invalid other than 0 to 9 A to F control code Does not accept the received data but the inverter does not trip H8 H9 HA Mode error Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer link operation mode when operation command source is not s...

Page 648: ...th 1 bit Without 0 bits Tab 5 233 Communication specifications NOTES In addition to the above 1 start bit is necessary Minimum number of total bits 9 bits maximum number of total bits 12 bits Item Check time Various monitors operation command Frequency setting RAM 12 ms Parameter read write Frequency setting EEPROM 30 ms Parameter clear all clear 5 s Reset command No answer Tab 5 234 Data check ti...

Page 649: ... signal To use the LF signal set 98 positive logic or 198 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to an output terminal I002738E Fig 5 239 Data transmission error NOTE For the RS 485 terminal communication the operation at a communication error occurrence depends on the Pr 502 Stop mode selection at communication error setting Refer to pa...

Page 650: ... the communication check time interval The inverter makes a communication check clearing of communication check counter regardless of the station number setting of the data sent from the master Communication check is started at the first communication in the operation mode having the operation source PU operation mode for PU connector communication in the initial setting or Network operation mode ...

Page 651: ...f changed communication information if bRet TRUE Set COM1 port timeout GetCommTimeouts hCom hTim Get current timeout values hTim WriteTotalTimeoutConstant 1000 Write timeout 1 second hTim ReadTotalTimeoutConstant 1000 Read timeout 1 second hTim ReadTotalTimeoutConstantSetCommTimeouts hCom hTim Setting of changed timeout values Setting of command for switching the station number 1 inverter to the N...

Page 652: ...ue to signal cable breakage etc the inverter cannot be stopped When the communication check time interval has elapsed the inverter will trip E PUE E SER The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching ON the RES signals or by switching the power OFF If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage computer fault etc the inverter does not detect such a fault This should be fully noted Por...

Page 653: ...r Increment 0 1 A FR F820 03160 75K or higher FR F840 01800 75K or higher 4 digits B E D Output voltage Read H71 H0000 to HFFFF Output voltage hexadecimal in 0 1 V increments 4 digits B E D Special monitor Read H72 H0000 to HFFFF Monitor data selected in the instruction code HF3 4 digits B E D Special monitor selection No Read H73 Monitor selection data Refer to page 5 198 for details on selection...

Page 654: ...n parameters or not can be selected according to the data Parameter clear H9696 Communication parameters are cleared H5A5A Communication parameters are not cleared All parameter clear H9966 Communication parameters are cleared H55AA Communication parameters are not cleared For the details of whether or not to clear parameters refer to page A 5 When a clear is performed with H9696 or H9966 communic...

Page 655: ...ad in increments of 0 1kW and rounds down to 0 01kW increments H20 blank code is set for blank area Example 0 75K 7 H20 H20 H20 H20 H20 H37 6 digits B E2 D NOTES Set 65520 HFFF0 as a parameter value 8888 and 65535 HFFFF as 9999 For the instruction codes HFF HEC and HF3 their values are held once written but cleared to zero when an inverter reset or all clear is performed When a 32 bit parameter se...

Page 656: ... signal 1F 9F 9 C6 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 60 E0 1 C11 931 Current output gain current 1F 9F 9 126 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 61 E1 1 C38 932 Terminal 4 bias command torque 20 A0 9 C7 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 61 E1 1 C39 932 Terminal 4 bias torque 20 A0 9 C12 917 Terminal 1 bias frequency speed 11 91 9 C40 933 Terminal 4 gain command torque 21 A1 9 C...

Page 657: ...n code Bit length Description Example Operation command HFA 8 bits b0 AU Terminal 4 input selection b1 Forward rotation command b2 Reverse rotation command b3 RL Low speed operation command b4 RM Middle speed operation command b5 RH High speed operation command b6 RT Second function selection b7 MRS Output stop Operation command extended HF9 16 bits b0 AU Terminal 4 input selection b1 Forward rota...

Page 658: ...load warning b5 IPF Instantaneous power failure undervoltage b6 FU Output frequency detection b7 ABC1 Fault Inverter status monitor extended H79 16 bits b0 RUN Inverter running b1 During forward rotation b2 During reverse rotation b3 SU Up to frequency b4 OL Overload warning b5 IPF Instantaneous power failure undervoltage b6 FU Output frequency detection b7 ABC1 Fault b8 ABC2 b9 Safety monitor out...

Page 659: ...acters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 A2 ENQ Inverterstation No Instruction Code HF0 Wait ing time Send datatype Receive datatype Data1 Data2 Sum check CR LF Format Number of characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 C1 STX Inverterstation No Send datatype Receive datatype Error code1 Error code2 Data1 Data2 ETX Sum check CR LF Data type Data 1 Data 2 Remarks 0 Op...

Page 660: ...lays the communication error count during MODBUS RTU communication Read only 539 N002 MODBUS RTU communication check time interval 9999 0 MODBUS RTU communication but the inverter trips in the NET operation mode 0 1 to 999 8 s Set the interval of the communication check signal loss detection time same specifications as Pr 122 9999 No communication check signal loss detection 549 N000 Protocol sele...

Page 661: ...munication protocol MODBUS RTU protocol Pr 549 Conforming standard EIA 485 RS 485 Connectable units 1 N maximum 32 units setting is 0 to 247 stations Pr 331 Communication Speed Selected among 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 115200 bps Pr 332 Control procedure Asynchronous system Communication method Half duplex system Communica tion specifica tions Character system Binary fixed...

Page 662: ...CRC check error Broadcast The master can broadcast messages to all slaves by specifying address 0 All slaves that receive a messagefromthemasterexecutetherequestedfunction Withthistypeofcommunication slaves do not return a response to the master I001227E Fig 5 242 Message format Item Check time Various monitors operation command Frequency setting RAM 12 ms Parameter read write Frequency setting EE...

Page 663: ...o 255 can be set in single byte lengths 8 bits for the function code The master sets the function to be sent to the slave as the request and the slave performs the requested operation Function code list summarizes the supported function codes An error response is generated when a function code other than Function code list is set At a response from the slave the function code set by the master is ...

Page 664: ... Functions are diagnosed communication check only A communication check can be made since the query message is sent and the query message is returned as it is as the return message subfunction code H00 function Subfunction code H00 Return Query Data Not available 5 495 Preset multiple registers Write H10 Data is written to consecutive multiple holding registers Data can be written to consecutive m...

Page 665: ...0002 is read No of points Set the number of holding registers to read Data can be read from up to 125 registers Tab 5 244 Description of the query message Message Description Byte count The setting range is H02 to HFA 2 to 250 Twice the number of reads specified by is set Data The amount of data specified by is set Read data is output Hi bytes first followed by Lo bytes and is arranged as follows ...

Page 666: ...its Message Description Slave address Set the address to send messages to Setting 0 enables broadcast communication Function Set H06 Register address Set the address from data is written to the holding register Register address holding register address decimal 40001 For example when register address 0001 is set data is written to holding register address 40002 Preset data Set the data to write to ...

Page 667: ...function Data CRC check 8 bits H08 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits Slave address Function Subfunction Data CRC check 8 bits H08 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits Message Description Slave address Set the address to send messages to Broadcast communication is not possible Invalid when 0 is set Function Set H08 Subfunction Set H0000 Dat...

Page 668: ...to the holding register Start address start register address decimal 40001 For example when start register address 0001 is set the data of holding register address 40002 is read No of points Set the number of holding registers to write to Data can be written to up to 125 registers Byte count The setting range is H02 to HFA 2 to 250 Set twice the value specified by d Data Set the amount of data spe...

Page 669: ...ion is not possible Invalid when 0 is set Function Set H46 Tab 5 249 Description of the query message Message Description Starting address The start address of the holding register that was successfully accessed is returned Start address start register address decimal 40001 For example when start address 0001 is returned the holding register address that was successfully accessed is 40002 No of po...

Page 670: ...response is also returned in the case of broadcast communication Slave address Function Exception code CRC check 8 bits H80 Function 8 bits 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits Message Description Slave address Set the address received from the master Function The function code requested by the master H80 is set Exception code The codes in the following table are set Tab 5 251 Description of response data Cod...

Page 671: ...sage frame error The data length of the message frame is checked and an error is generated if the received data length is less than 4 bytes CRC check error An error is generated if the data in the message frame does not match the calculation result Tab 5 253 Error check items NOTE The LF signal can be assigned to an output terminal by setting Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection Cha...

Page 672: ...he computer link specification Real time monitor Refer to page 5 198 for the register numbers and monitored items of the real time monitor Bit Definition Control input command Inverter status 0 Stop command RUN Inverter running 1 Forward rotation command During forward rotation 2 Reverse rotation command During reverse rotation 3 RH High speed operation command SU Up to frequency 4 RM Middle speed...

Page 673: ...inal 4 frequency setting gain analog value Read Write Analog value set to C7 905 43905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain terminal analog value Read Analog value of current voltage applied to terminal 4 C12 917 41917 Terminal 1 bias frequency speed Read Write C13 917 42107 Terminal 1 bias speed Read Write Analog value set to C13 917 43917 Terminal 1 bias speed terminal analog value Read Analog valu...

Page 674: ...to terminal 4 C42 934 41934 PID display bias coefficient Read Write C43 934 42124 PID display bias analog value Read Write Analog value set to C43 934 43934 PID display bias analog value terminal analog value Read Analog value of current voltage applied to terminal 4 C44 935 41935 PID display gain coefficient Read Write C45 935 42125 PID display gain analog value Read Write Analog value set to C45...

Page 675: ...ers Read 44003 Model Fifth and sixth characters Read 44004 Model Seventh and eighth characters Read 44005 Model Ninth and tenth characters Read 44006 Model Eleventh and twelfth characters Read 44007 Model Thirteenth and fourteenth characters Read 44008 Model Fifteenth and sixteenth characters Read 44009 Model Seventeenth and eighteenth characters Read 44010 Model Nineteenth and twentieth character...

Page 676: ...er within the communication check time interval The inverter makes a communication check clearing of communication check counter regardless of the station number setting of the data sent from the master The communication check is made from the first communication in the Network operation mode can be changed by Pr 551 PU mode operation command source selection The communication check time by query ...

Page 677: ...le RS 485 terminal communication Pr 539 0 1 to 999 8s Query communication Broadcast communication Operation mode External PLC master Inverter slave Inverter slave PLC master Pr 539 Communication check counter Response Message 1 Response Message 2 Query Message 2 Query Message 1 Data absence time 3 5 bytes or more Check start OFF ON Time Fault E SER Pr 539 PLC master Inverter slave Inverter slave P...

Page 678: ...8 20 23to 25 34 38 40to 45 50to57 61 62 64 67to69 81 to 96 98 100 775 M102 Operation panel monitor selection 2 776 M103 Operation panel monitor selection 3 331 N030 RS 485 communication station number 0 0 to 127 Set the inverter station number node 332 N031 RS 485 communication speed 96 96 192 384 576 768 1152 Set the communication speed The setting value 100 equals the communication speed For exa...

Page 679: ...n passing token bus Master slave only the master is available for this product Communication protocol MS TP master slave token passing LAN Maximum connection 255 up to 32 for one segment addition with a repeater is available Node number 0 to 127 Master 0 to 127 this product is the master Supported property of BACnet standard object type Refer to page 5 510 Supported BIBBs Annex K Refer to page 5 5...

Page 680: ...ommunication OFF 1 Automatic baud rate recognition Automatic baud rate recognition Communication error during automatic baud rate recognition is not counted OFF 2 Not joined the network Waiting for a token to the own node OFF 10 Data to the own node Received a token to the own node OFF 11 Received a supported request to the own node including broadcasting OFF 12 Received an unsupported request to ...

Page 681: ...6 setting Operation 0 to 127 Automatic baud rate recognition is invalid Using Pr 332 setting for baud rate 128 to 255 Inverter monitors the data on the communication bus and automatically switches the baud rate The recognized baud rate is written to Pr 332 Tab 5 263 Pr 726 settings NOTES After the baud rate recognition the recognized baud rate is written in EEPROM as the Pr 332 set ting regardless...

Page 682: ... value Device APDU timeout R Application software version R Database revision R Device address binding R Event state R R R R R R Firmware revision R Max APDU length accepted R Max info frames W Max master W Model name R Number of APDU retries R Object identifier R R R R R R R Object list R Object name R R R R R R R Object type R R R R R R R Out of service R R R R R R Polarity R R Present value R C...

Page 683: ...e range varies depending on the Pr 73 and Pr 267 settings 10 to 10 V 100 to 100 5 to 5 V 100 to 100 percent 98 1 Terminal 2 R Represents actual input voltage or input current of terminal 2 The range varies depending on the Pr 73 and Pr 267 settings 0 to 10 V 0 to 100 0 to 5 V 0 to 100 0 to 20 mA 0 to 100 percent 98 2 Terminal 4 R Represents actual input voltage or input current of terminal 4 The r...

Page 684: ...Second PID deviation R Represents the second PID deviation monitor Minus display is available with reference to 0 in 0 1 increment no units 95 95 Second PID measured value 2 R Represents the second PID measured value 2 monitor no units 95 200 Alarm history 1 R Represents the fault history 1 the latest fault monitor no units 95 201 Alarm history 2 R Represents the fault history 2 second fault in pa...

Page 685: ...nd C44 Pr 1138 Depending on the setting the writing value and the reading value may not be the same at the minimum digit 321 Second PID measured value CMD C Set the second PID measured value This object is the measured value during PID operation if Pr 753 60 or 61 Setting range 0 00 to 100 00 no units 95 322 Second PID deviation CMD C Set the second PID deviation 0 01 increment This object is the ...

Page 686: ...minal STOP R Represents actual input of terminal STOP 10 Terminal RES R Represents actual input of terminal RES 11 Terminal CS R Represents actual input of terminal CS 100 Terminal RUN R Represents actual output of terminal RUN 101 Terminal SU R Represents actual output of terminal SU 102 Terminal IPF R Represents actual output of terminal IPF 103 Terminal OL R Represents actual output of terminal...

Page 687: ...etting 1 of this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr 184 301 Control input instruction RT C Controls the function assigned to terminal RT Setting 1 of this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr 183 302 Control input instruction RL C Controls the function assigned to terminal RL Setting 1 of this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr 180 303 Control input instruction RM C Controls the...

Page 688: ...settings For the details refer to page 5 128 The restrictions depending on the operation mode changes according to the computer link specifications Real time monitor The register numbers and the monitor items are the same as those of the MODBUS RTU real time monitor Refer to the MODBUS RTU real time monitor on page 5 198 Register Definition Read write Remarks 40010 Operation mode inverter setting ...

Page 689: ...analog value Read Analog value of the current voltage applied to the terminal 4 C12 917 41917 Terminal 1 bias frequency speed Read write C13 917 42107 Terminal 1 bias speed Read write Analog value set to C13 917 43917 Terminal 1 bias speed terminal analog value Read Analog value of the voltage applied to the terminal 1 C14 918 41918 Terminal 1 gain frequency speed Read write C15 918 42108 Terminal...

Page 690: ... write Analog value set to C45 935 43935 PID display gain analog value terminal analog value Read Analog value of the current voltage applied to the terminal 4 1000 to 1999 45000 to 45999 Refer to the parameter list page 5 2 for parameter names Read write The parameter number 44000 is the register number Register Definition Read write Remarks 40501 Faults history 1 Read write Being 2 bytes in leng...

Page 691: ...ead 44006 Inverter type 11th and12th characters Read 44007 Inverter type 13th and 14th characters Read 44008 Inverter type 15th and 16th characters Read 44009 Inverter type 17th and 18th characters Read 44010 Inverter type 19th and 20th characters Read 44011 Capacity 1st and 2nd characters Read Reading inverter capacity in ASCII code Data is read in increments of 0 1 kW and rounds down to 0 01 kW ...

Page 692: ..._________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ BACnet Standardized Device Profile Annex L BACnet Operator Workstation B OWS BACnet Building Controller B BC BACnet Advanced Application Controller B AAC BACnet Applica...

Page 693: ... RS 485 ARCNET Clause 8 baud rate s MS TP master Clause 9 baud rate s 9600 19200 38400 76800 MS TP slave Clause 9 baud rate s Point To Point EIA 232 Clause 10 baud rate s Point To Point modem Clause 10 baud rate s LonTalk Clause 11 medium Other Device Address Binding Is static device binding supported This is currently necessary for two way communication with MS TP slaves and certain other devices...

Page 694: ...0 0 to 255 1427 N630 Ethernet function selection 1 5001 502 5000 to 5002 5006 to 5008 5010 to 5013 9999 45237 61450 Set the application protocol etc 1428 N631 Ethernet function selection 2 45237 502 5000 to 5002 5006 to 5008 5010 to 5013 9999 45237 61450 1429 N632 Ethernet function selection 3 9999 502 5000 to 5002 5006 to 5008 5010 to 5013 9999 45237 61450 1426 N641 Link speed and duplex mode sel...

Page 695: ... devices that send the operation or speed command through the Ethernet network Modbus TCP or CCLink IE Field Network Basic set the range of IP addresses of the devices When Pr 1449 to Pr 1452 0 initial value no IP address is specified for sending commands through the Ethernet network In this case operation through the Ethernet network Modbus TCP or CC Link IE Field Network Basic is not available W...

Page 696: ...ment via a hub and if the communication between the other equipment and the hub is interrupted and resumed the communication between the inverter and the other equipment may not be established depending on the speci fications of the hub To re establish communication with the other equipment reset the inverter to forcefully close the connection Setting a shorter time in Pr 1455 Keepalive time is al...

Page 697: ...the inverter belongs in Pr 1438 to Pr 1441 Pr 1426 setting Communication speed Full duplex halfduplex system Remarks 0 initial value Automatic negotiation Automatic negotiation The communication speed and the communication mode half duplex full duplex are automatically negotiated to ensure the optimum setting 1 100 Mbps Full duplex 2 100 Mbps Half duplex 3 10 Mbps Full duplex 4 10 Mbps Half duplex...

Page 698: ...arger than the other in Pr 1443 and Pr 1446 Pr 1444 and Pr 1447 and Pr 1445 and Pr 1448 I003109E Fig 5 250 Process of Keepalive checking Example Setting example 1 In this case the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is 192 168 x 1 to 3 xxx 100 to 150 I003110A Fig 5 251 Ethernet IP filtering function setting example 1 Connected device Normal communication KeepAlive ACK fir...

Page 699: ...nverter and the system againstunauthorizedaccessbyexternalsystems takeadditionalsecuritymeasures Mitsubishi Electric Corporation will not take any responsibility for any problems in the inverter and the system incurred by unauthorized access The following are examples of measures to prevent unauthorized access Install a firewall Install a personal computer as a relay station and control the relayi...

Page 700: ...n the other in Pr 1451 and Pr 1453 and Pr 1452 and Pr 1454 When 9999 initial value is set in Pr 1453 and Pr 1454 the range is invalid Example Setting example 1 In this case the IP address range for command source selection via Ethernet communication is 192 168 x 1 to 3 xxx 100 to 150 I003112A Fig 5 253 Ethernet IP address for command source selection setting example 1 Example Setting example 2 In ...

Page 701: ...etwork operation A signal loss detection is made when any of 0 1 s to 999 8 s is set in Pr 1432 In order to enable the signal loss detection data must be sent by connected devices at an interval equal to or less than the time set for the communication check The inverter makes a communication check clearing of communication check counter regardless of the station number setting of the data sent fro...

Page 702: ... MELSOFT FA product connection for the application For how to set the application value refer to the Instruction Manual of the device connected via Ethernet Refer to page 5 524 Enter the Ethernet communication network number in Pr 1424 and the Ethernet communication station number in Pr 1425 Refer to page 5 530 Enable the PLC function Pr 414 PLC function operation selection 0 initial value to use ...

Page 703: ...number specification 548 N041 USB communication check time interval 9999 0 USB communication is possible however the inverter will trip E USB when the mode changes to the PU operation mode 0 1 to 999 8 s Set the communication check time interval If a no communication state persists for longer than the permissible time the inverter will trip E USB 9999 No communication check Specification Descripti...

Page 704: ...parameter setting When Pr 549 Protocol selection 1 MODBUS RTU protocol the setting range is as shown in the parentheses When the set value is outside of the setting range the initial value is applied Automatic connection system configuration Parameters referred to Pr 551 PU mode operation command source selection page 5 130 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 117 N020 PU communication ...

Page 705: ...matic change parameter Setting value after change PU connector connection RS 485 terminal connection Communication speed Pr 118 Pr 332 Depending on the setting of the connected device on the GOT side Data length stop bit Pr 119 Pr 333 Parity Pr 120 Pr 334 Waiting time setting Pr 123 Pr 337 CR LF selection Pr 124 Pr 341 Number of communication retries Pr 121 Pr 335 9999 fixed Communication check ti...

Page 706: ...king torque Regenerative brake selection P E300 P T721 Pr 30 Pr 599 5 552 To operate the inverter with DC power supply DC feeding mode P E300 Pr 30 5 552 To avoid overvoltage alarm due to regenerative driving by automatic adjustment of the output frequency Regeneration avoidance function P G120 to P G125 Pr 882 to Pr 886 Pr 665 5 560 To decrease the deceleration time of the motor Increased magneti...

Page 707: ...11K to FR F840 00770 37K Initial value for the FR F820 01870 45K FR F820 02330 55K FR F840 00930 45K FR F840 01160 55K Initial value for the FR F820 03160 75K or higher and FR F840 01800 75K or higher Starting torque adjustment Assuming Pr 19 Base frequency voltage is 100 set the output voltage at 0 Hz to Pr 0 Pr 46 in percentage Perform the adjustment of the parameter little by little approximate...

Page 708: ...r value when the distance between the inverter and the motor is long or when there is not enough motor torque in the low speed range It may cause overcurrent trip when it is set too large Setting for Pr 0 and Pr 46 becomes enabled only when the V F control is selected When the initial value is set in Pr 0 the Pr 0 setting is automatically changed by changing the Pr 71 Applied motor Pr 81 Number of...

Page 709: ...e the base frequency when using single inverter switching between multiple motors use Pr 47 Second V F base frequency Pr 47 will become enabled when the RT signal turns ON Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description FM CA 3 G001 Base frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at the rated motor torque 50 Hz 60 Hz 19 G002 Base frequency voltage 9999 8888 0 to 1000 V Set the base voltag...

Page 710: ...d magnetic flux vector control or PM motor control is selected Pr 3 Pr 47 and Pr 19 will become disabled and Pr 83 and Pr 84 will become enabled However S pattern curve with Pr 29 Acceleration deceleration pattern selection 1 S pattern acceleration deceleration A will make Pr 3 or Pr 47 enabled S pattern curve at the time of the PM motor control is the rated frequency of the motor When Pr 71 Appli...

Page 711: ...otation speed is changed such as conveyor dolly or roll drive Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 14 G003 Load pattern selection 1 0 For constant torque load 1 For variable torque load Fig 5 261 Constant torque load I002750E NOTE Select for constant torque load setting value 0 even for fan and pump in following cases When accelerating a blower with large moment of inertia J in a short ...

Page 712: ...FR F840 00770 37K or higher Setthis parameter whendriving a loadwithload torque change proportionallyagainst thesquare of the rotation speed such as fan and pump Fig 5 262 Variable torque load I002751E NOTE Pr 14 will become enabled at the time of V F control Parameters referred to Pr 0 Torque boost page 5 535 Pr 3 Base frequency page 5 537 Pr 178 to Pr 182 input terminal function selection page 5...

Page 713: ...tor control Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 60 G030 Energy saving control selection 0 0 Normal operation 4 Energy saving operation 9 Optimum excitation control NOTES An energy saving effect is not expected with the energy saving operation mode for applications with high load torque or with the equipment with frequent acceleration and deceleration An energy saving effect is not expe...

Page 714: ... Setting range Description 71 C100 Applied motor 0 2 Standard motor such as SF JR Adjustable 5 points V F Others Refer to page 5 297 100 G040 V F1 first frequency 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 Set each point of the V F pattern frequency voltage 9999 Do not set V F 101 G041 V F1 first frequency voltage 0 V 0 to 1000 V 102 G042 V F2 second frequency 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 103 G043 V F2 second frequency volta...

Page 715: ...e Set each point for Pr 100 to Pr 109 frequency voltage within the range of Pr 3 Base frequency and Pr 19 Base frequency voltage When Pr 71 2 Pr 47 Second V F base frequency will not function When Pr 71 2 electronic thermal O L relay will make calculations assuming a standard motor By simultaneously using Pr 60 Energy saving control selection and the adjustable 5 points V F further energy saving e...

Page 716: ...ntrol Use Pr 674 SF PR slip amount adjustment gain to fine tune the rotations per minute To reduce the rotations per minute to increase the compensation frequency set a larger value in Pr 674 To increase the rotations per minute to reduce the compensation frequency set a smaller value in Pr 674 Lower rotations per minute reduce the power consumption and higher rotations per minute increase the pow...

Page 717: ...ke operation frequency will be fixed to 0 Hz at the time of PM motor control Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 10 G100 DC injection brake operation frequency 3 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the operation frequency for the DC injection brake 9999 Operate at Pr 13 or lower 11 G101 DC injection brake operation time 0 5 s 0 Without DC injection brake 0 1 to 10 s Set the operation time for the DC in...

Page 718: ...ake will not operate The motor will coast to stop When Pr 11 8888 DC injection brake will operate when the X13 signal is turned ON DC injection brake will operate when the X13 signal is turned ON even while operating For the X13 signal input set 13 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 to assign the function Fig 5 265 When Pr 11 is set to 8888 I001559E NOTE The X13 signal is disabled during PM motor control ...

Page 719: ...Pr 12 is made larger braking torque will be limited so the output cur rent will be within the rated current of the inverter E CAUTION Install a mechanical brake to make an emergency stop or to stay stopped for a long time Parameters referred to Pr 13 Starting frequency page 5 115 page 5 117 Pr 71 Applied motor page 5 297 Pr 80 Motor capacity page 5 45 Pr 178 to Pr 182 input terminal function selec...

Page 720: ...nderPMmotorcontrol at the start Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 522 G105 Output stop frequency 9999 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency to start coasting to a stop output shutoff 9999 No function I002843E Fig 5 266 Example for inverter output shutoff NOTE When the output stop function is valid Pr 522 9999 the DC injunction brake becomes invalid and the motor coasts to stop when the outpu...

Page 721: ...ettings Activation of the restart function is recom mended especially for a PM motor The output stop frequency function is disabled during PID control JOG operation power failure stop traverse function operation or offline auto tuning Output stop function does not operate during reverse rotation deceleration However when the frequency setting signal and output frequency falls to Pr 522 or lower th...

Page 722: ...quency page 5 115 page 5 117 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description Start signal STF STR Refer to page 5 293 Stop operation 250 G106 Stop selection 9999 0 to 100 s STF signal Forward rotation start STR signal Reverse rotation start It will coast to stop after set time when the start signal is turned OFF 1000 s to 1100 s STF signal Start signal STR signal Forward reverse rotation signal It...

Page 723: ... due to communication error Pr 502 Offline auto tuning with motor rotation When Pr 250 9999 or 8888 acceleration deceleration is performed in accordance to the fre quency command until the output is shutoff by turning OFF the start signal When the restart signal is turned ON during the motor coasting the operation is resumed from Pr 13 Starting frequency Parameters referred to Pr 7 Acceleration ti...

Page 724: ...pply terminal P and N such as batteries at the time of power failure While the power is supplied only to the control circuit the reset operation when the power is supplied to the main circuit can be selected The initial value or setting range for the standard model The initial value or setting range for the separated converter type Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 30 E300 Regenerati...

Page 725: ...t Pr 30 1 11 21 Regeneration unit Power supply terminals of inverter Pr 30 Setting Brake unit FR BU2 GZG GRZG FR BR FR BU BU R S T 0 initial value 100 P N 10 110 R S T P N 20 120 High power factor converter FR HC2 Power regeneration common converter FR CV P N 2 102 For manufacturer setting Do not set 1 11 21 101 111 121 Tab 5 282 FR F820 02330 55K or lower FR F840 01160 55K or lower Regeneration u...

Page 726: ...signal X11 FR HC2 con nection FR CC2 connection During the operation using RS 485 communication with the remote output and analog remote output functions enabled the X11 signal is used to store the status when the inverter is set to store the status before an instantaneous power failure Input the IPF signal instantaneous power failure detection signal of the FR HC2 or FR CC2 For the terminal to be...

Page 727: ... the option unit Operation according to the X10 signal status FR HC2 FR CV FR CC2 0 Initial value of standard models RDY negative logic initial setting RDYB RDB X10 ON Inverter output shutoff NO contact 1 Initial value of separated converter types RDY positive logic RDYA RDA X10 OFF Inverter output shutoff NC contact Tab 5 285 Selecting NO NC contact for X10 signal NOTES If the X10 signal is unass...

Page 728: ... of power failure Connect the AC power supply to the AC power supply connecting terminals R L1 S L2 and T L3 andconnecttheDCpowersupplytotheterminalsP andN Also removethejumpersbetween terminal R L1 and R L11as well as between S L2 and S1 L21 and connect the terminals R1 L11 and S1 L21 to the terminals P and N Operation with DC current is possible by turning ON the DC feeding operation permission ...

Page 729: ...on stop Pr 261 0 will occur and Y85 signal will turn OFF after stopping After turning ON the X71 signal operation is not possible even if the X70 signal is turned ON Set 71 to either of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Output Y85 DC feeding signal This will turn ON during power failure or undervoltage of the AC power supply It will turn OFF when the X71 signal turns ON or power restoration The Y85 signal will not...

Page 730: ... Operation example 2 at power failure when DC power is restored Control power supply AC power supply Y85 MC X70 X71 STF STR Output frequency Hz Time AC power supply DC power supply ON ON ON ON ON ON Motor coasting Approx 200 ms Back up operation Control power supply AC power supply Y85 MC X70 X71 STF STR Output frequency Hz Time AC power supply DC ON ON ON ON ON Motor coasting Approx 200 ms Back u...

Page 731: ...2 10 11 DC feeding an option fault E OPT will occur When set to Pr 30 2 10 11 20 21 DC feeding and operated by DC feeding detection of undervoltage E UVT and instantaneous power failure E IPF is not performed When DC power is switched on a larger inrush current flows than in AC power The number of power on times should be minimized Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input term...

Page 732: ...erate overvoltage error but actual deceleration time will be longer Set the setting value higher than power supply voltage 400V Class 760VDC 884 G122 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity 0 0 Disables regeneration avoidance due to bus voltage change rate 1 to 5 Set the sensitivity to detect the bus voltage change rate Setting value 1 5 Detection sensitivity Low High 885 G123...

Page 733: ...aveform Make sure that the setting value of Pr 883 will not get under DC bus voltage level The frequency will rise with operation of the regeneration avoidance function even at the time of no regenera tive status The stall prevention overvoltage oL will only operate during deceleration stopping the lower ing of output frequency but on the other hand the regeneration avoidance function will con sta...

Page 734: ...ring deceleration when the frequency increases due to the regeneration avoidance operation and exceeds the limit value the limit value will be retained until the output frequency is reduced to be the half the Pr 885 setting When the frequency that have increased by the regeneration avoidance operation exceeds Pr 1 Maximum frequency it will be limited to the maximum frequency By setting to Pr 885 9...

Page 735: ...ration selection The OL signal output timing can be set with Pr 157 OL signal output timer The stall prevention is enabled even at the time of regeneration avoidance operation The regeneration avoidance function cannot decrease the actual deceleration time for the motor to stop The actual deceleration time is determined by the regenerative power consumption per formance so to decrease the decelera...

Page 736: ...tion decel eration operation increase the deceleration time or raise the setting value of Pr 661 When the stall prevention overcurrent occurs increase the deceleration time or lower the setting value of Pr 661 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration is enabled with V F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 660 G130 Increased magnetic excit...

Page 737: ...creased magnetic excita tion deceleration adjust with Pr 662 Overcurrent preventive function will be disabled when Pr 662 0 NOTE When set to Pr 662 Pr 22 Stall prevention operation level overcurrent preventive function will operate at the setting value of Pr 22 Operates at Pr 622 when Pr 22 0 Parameters referred to Pr 22 Stall prevention operation level page 5 180 Pr 30 Regenerative function selec...

Page 738: ...voltage E OV error will occur more frequently when the load inertia is larger 247 G205 Constant power range slip compensation selection 9999 0 Do not perform slip compensation at constant output range frequency range higher than the frequency set in Pr 3 9999 Perform the slip compensation of the constant output range Rated slip Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency rated rotation speed ...

Page 739: ...quency of torque deviation speed deviation or converter output voltage deviation by the mechanical resonance with a measurement device etc set the frequency of 1 2 to 1 times the vibration frequency in Pr 654 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency Setting vibrational frequency range can suppress the vibration better Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 653 G410 Speed smoothing control 0 0 to ...

Page 740: ...ter number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number To perform a parameter clear turn to and to perform all parameter clear turn it to and press initial value appears Parameter clear Turn to change the set value to Press to enter the setting and flicker alternately after parameters are cleared Turn to read another parameter Press to show the setting again Press twice to show the next...

Page 741: ...nitor When Pr 79 0 initial value Press SET key to clear the parameter Stop the inverter first A writing error occurs if a parameter clear is attempted while the inverter is running To perform a parameter clear the inverter must be in the PU operation mode even if 2 is set to Pr 77 For availability of parameter clear and all parameter clear for each parameter refer to the parame ter list on page A ...

Page 742: ...ration panel is disconnected etc during parameter copy writing write again or check the setting values by parameter verification When parameters are copied from a different capacity inverter there are parameters with differ ent initial values depending on the inverter capacity so the setting values of some parameters will be automatically changed After performing a parameter copy from a different ...

Page 743: ...Tab 5 292 Reading the parameter settings of the inverter to the operation panel NOTE appears Why Parameter read error Perform the operation from step again Operation Connect the operation panel to the destination inverter Parameter setting mode Press to choose the parameter setting mode The parameter number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number Turn to parameter copy and press app...

Page 744: ...on page 5 571 Move the operation panel to the inverter to be verified Screen at power ON The monitor display appears Parameter setting mode Press to choose the parameter setting mode The parameter number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number Turn to parameter copy Press appears Parameter verification Turn to change to setting value parameter copy verification mode Press Verificati...

Page 745: ...SB memory in the inverter The USB memory mode is displayed and USB memory opera tions are possible I002762E Fig 5 280 Changes in USB memory copy operation states Monitor mode Parameter setting mode Function mode Faults history mode USB memory mode Copy the parameter setting from the inverter to the USB memory device Overwrite the inverter parameter setting onto the designated file in the USB memor...

Page 746: ...ator2 During password lock parameter copy and parameter verification cannot be performed Refer to page 5 76 Operation Insert the USB memory into the copy source inverter USB memory mode Press to change to the USB memory mode Displaying the file selection screen Press three times to display file selection screen and press To overwrite files on USB memory display the file selection screen turn to se...

Page 747: ... F820 03160 75K or higher or FR F840 01800 75K or higher When CP and 0 00 flicker alternately set the Pr 989 Parameter copy alarm release as shown below initial value After setting Pr 989 perform setting of Pr 9 Pr 30 Pr 51 Pr 56 Pr 57 Pr 72 Pr 80 Pr 82 Pr 90 to Pr 94 Pr 453 Pr 455 Pr 458 to Pr 462 Pr 557 Pr 859 Pr 860 and Pr 893 again When the destination inverter is other than the FR F800 series...

Page 748: ...le number Turn to select the file number to be verified and press Parameter verification Turn to display the setting parameter copy verification mode and press appears Press Verification of the parameter settings copied to the USB memory and the parameter settings of the verification destination inverter is started It takes about 15 seconds to verify all the settings During verification flickers I...

Page 749: ...e appear in order If is pressed with parameters that have been changed the parameter settings can be changed as they are Parameter numbers are no longer displayed in the list when they are returned to their initial values Other changed parameters appear by turning is returned to when the last changed parameter is displayed Tab 5 298 Initial value change list NOTES The calibration parameters C0 Pr ...

Page 750: ...tion Manual of external devices Initial setting SLMP can be used when the PLC function is enabled Set a value other than 0 in Pr 414 PLC function operation selection To select SLMP for the application set any value from 5010 to 5013 in any of Pr 1427 to Pr 1429 Ethernet function selection 1 to 3 For how to set the application value refer to the Instruction Manual of the device connected via Ethern...

Page 751: ...st message Execution of the operation Receiving the response message Returning a response message Closing the connection Closing the connection The process is repeated as needed The inverter accepts the connection request from the external device Passive open Upon establishment of the connection the external device sends a request message to the inverter Accordingtotherequestmessagesentfromthe ext...

Page 752: ...n with UDP IP External device Inverter Sending a request message Execution of the operation Receiving the response message Returning a response message End of the communication The process is repeated as needed Theexternal devicesendsarequestmessage to the inverter Accordingtotherequestmessagesentfromthe externaldevice theinverterexecutesareading writing or other operation The external device rece...

Page 753: ...r information Item Size Endian Description Header Header for TCP IP or UDP IP The header is added by the external device before transmission Subheader QnA compatible 3E frame 2 bytes Big Request H5000 Response HD000 Subheader QnA compatible 4E frame 6 bytes Request H5400 Serial No H0000 Response HD400 Serial No H0000 Destination network No 1 byte Specify the network No of the access destination Us...

Page 754: ... the access destination refer to page 5 592 is stored for failed completion Response data Variable Little When the command is completed normally data such as the read data corresponding to the command is stored Error information 9 bytes The network No responding station 1 byte station No responding station 1 byte destination unit I O No 2 bytes and destination multidrop station No 1 byte of the st...

Page 755: ...ers The devices with non consecutive numbers can be specified The value is read from the bit devices in 16 bit or 32 bit units 5 588 H0000 The inverter reads the value in the devices with the specified numbers The devices with non consecutive numbers can be specified The value is read from the word devices in 1 word or 2 word units Write random In bit units H1402 H0001 The inverter writes the valu...

Page 756: ...ng Manual Special register SD Word HA9 Input X Bit H9C H0 to H7F hexadecimal Output Y Bit H9D H0 to H7F hexadecimal Internal relay M Bit H90 0 to 127 decimal Data register D Word HA8 0 to 255 decimal Timer T Contact TS Bit HC1 0 to 15 decimal Coil TC HC0 Current value TN Word HC2 Retentive timer ST Contact STS Bit HC7 0 Initial value Up to 16 retentive timers can be used by PLC parameter assignmen...

Page 757: ...The number of devices is specified for reading writing data A two byte numerical value is sent from the lower byte to the upper byte Specification of the number of devices for bit access The number of devices is specified for reading writing data in bit units The number is used in the Write random command refer to page 5 590 Example Device No of Internal relay M63 Input X20 Internal relay M63 has ...

Page 758: ... each device is specified in one bit The data is stored from the lower byte bit 0 to bit 7 to the upper byte bit 8 to bit 15 Example ON OFF state of five devices starting from M10 Example ON OFF state of 32 devices starting from M16 H0A H00 H00 H90 H05 H00 H10 H10 H10 Head device Device code Number of devices Data 0 is shown when the number of points is an odd number M14 ON M13 OFF M12 ON M11 OFF ...

Page 759: ...ead from the device is stored in hexadecimal Example Data stored in D50 D51 Sub command First device No Device code No of devices H01 H04 Item Description Subcommand Specify the unit bit word for reading First device No Specify the number of the first device Refer to page 5 585 Device code Specify the type of the target devices Refer to page 5 584 Number of devices Specify the number of target dev...

Page 760: ...ubcommand Specify the unit bit word for reading Number of devices for word access Specify the number of devices for one word access bit device 16 bits word device one word Number of devices for double word access Specify the number of devices for two word access bit device 32 bits word device two words Word access Specify the devices according to the number set in the request data for word access ...

Page 761: ...5 589 Response data The value read from the device is stored in hexadecimal Word access Double word access Read data 1 Read data 2 Data in the devices specified for word access Data in the devices specified for double word access Read data 1 Read data 2 ...

Page 762: ...ata for double word access It is not necessary to specify the devices when 0 is set Device No Specify the number of the devices Refer to page 5 585 Device code Specify the type of the target devices Refer to page 5 584 Set reset Specify the data to write ON OFF of the bit devices ON H01 OFF H00 Either of the one byte numerical values is sent Tab 5 305 Request data description for random write H02 ...

Page 763: ...Item Description Mode Forced execution of the remote RUN is not allowed H0100 Forced execution of the remote RUN is allowed H0300 Clear mode Devices are not cleared initialized H00 Devices are cleared H01 H02 Tab 5 306 Request data description for remote RUN instruction H02 H10 H00 H00 H01 H00 H01 H01 H00 H00 Model Model code Item Description Model The inverter model is stored Up to 16 characters ...

Page 764: ...ation unit I O No is different from that of the target inverter HC059 The command or subcommand is specified incorrectly Or an unspecified command is received HC05B The inverter cannot read write data from to the specified device HC05C The request message has an error HC060 The requested operation has an error Example Data is specified incorrectly for the bit device HC061 The request data length i...

Page 765: ...having the address specified by the master Normal response After the query from the master is received the slave executes the request function and returns the corresponding normal response to the master Error response When an invalid function code address or data is received by the slave the error response is returned to the master This response is appended with an error code that indicates the re...

Page 766: ... other than 0 it does not send the response message 0 is returned in the response from the slave Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte Unit identifier Fixed to 255 Function code 1 to 255 can be set in single byte lengths 8 bits for the function code The master sets the function to be sent to the slave as the request and the slave performs the requested...

Page 767: ...check only A communication check can be made since the query message is sent and the query message is returned as it is as the return message subfunction code H00 function Subfunction code H00 Return query data 5 599 Preset multiple registers Write H10 Data is written to consecutive multiple holding registers Data can be written to consecutive multiple Modbus registers to output instructions to th...

Page 768: ... Fixed to 0 When the slave receives data other than 0 it does not send the response message 0 is returned in the response from the slave Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte Unit identifier Fixed to 255 Function Set H03 Starting address Set the holding register address from which to start reading of data Starting address start register address decimal...

Page 769: ...entifier Protocol Identifier Length field Unit identifier Func tion Starting address No of points H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H06 8 bits H11 8 bits H03 8 bits H03 8 bits HEB 8 bits H00 8 bits H03 8 bits A given value is set Transaction identifier Protocol Identifier Length field Unit identi fier Func tion Byte count Data H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H09 8 bits H11 8 bits H03 8 bits H06 8 ...

Page 770: ...ster adds the data for the purpose of transaction control The same data is returned in the response from the slave Protocol Identifier Fixed to 0 When the slave receives data other than 0 it does not send the response message 0 is returned in the response from the slave Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte Unit identifier Fixed to 255 Function Set H06...

Page 771: ...8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits Transaction identifier Protocol Identifier Length field Unit identifier Function Subfunction Data H 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits 8 bits H08 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits Message Description Transaction identifier The master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control The same data is returned in the res...

Page 772: ...master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control The same data is returned in the response from the slave Protocol Identifier Fixed to 0 When the slave receives data other than 0 it does not send the response message 0 is returned in the response from the slave Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte Unit identifier Fixed to 255 Function Set H...

Page 773: ...rting address No of points Byte count Data H00 8bits H00 8bits H00 8bits H0B 8bits H19 8bits H10 8bits H03 8bits HEE 8bits H00 8bits H02 8bits H04 8bits H00 8bits H05 8bits H00 8bits H0A 8bits A given value is set Transaction identifier Protocol Identifier Length field Unit iden tifier Func tion Starting address No of points H00 8bits H00 8bits H00 8bits H06 8bits H19 8bits H10 8bits H03 8bits HEE...

Page 774: ...bits 8 bits H46 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits Message Description Transaction identifier The master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control The same data is returned in the response from the slave Protocol Identifier Fixed to 0 When the slave receives data other than 0 it does not send the response message 0 is returned in the response from the slave Length field The data...

Page 775: ...r 7 are returned Transaction identifier Protocol Identifier Length field Unit identi fier Func tion H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H02 8 bits H19 8 bits H46 8 bits A given value is set Transaction identifier Protocol Identifier Length field Unit identi fier Func tion Starting address No of points H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H06 8 bits H19 8 bits H10 8 bits H03 8 bits HEE 8 bits H00 8 bits H...

Page 776: ...master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control The same data is returned in the response from the slave Protocol identifier Fixed to 0 When the slave receives data other than 0 it does not send the response message 0 is returned in the response from the slave Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte Unit identifier Fixed to 255 Function The f...

Page 777: ... input command Read Write Refer to the following table tab 5 322 40010 Operation mode inverter setting Read Write Refer to the following table tab 5 322 40014 Running frequency RAM value Read Write The display can be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr 37 and Pr 144 Refer to page 5 196 40015 Running frequency EEPROM value Write Tab 5 321 System environment variable Bit Definition Control ...

Page 778: ... for the separated converter type The signal within parentheses is the initial status The output signal function can be changed using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection page 5 231 No function is assigned in the initial status for the separated converter type Enable disable parameter writing by Pr 79 and Pr 340 settings For the details refer to page 5 128 Restrictions in each opera...

Page 779: ...y setting gain analog value Read Write Analog value set to C7 905 43905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain terminal analog value Read Analog value of current voltage applied to terminal 4 C12 917 41917 Terminal 1 bias frequency speed Read Write C13 917 42107 Terminal 1 bias speed Read Write Analog value set to C13 917 43917 Terminal 1 bias speed terminal analog value Read Analog value of voltage ap...

Page 780: ...931 Current output gain signal Read Write C11 931 42121 Current output gain current Read Write Analog value set to C11 931 C38 932 41932 Terminal 4 bias command torque Read Write C39 932 42122 Terminal 4 bias torque Read Write Analog value set to C39 932 43932 Terminal 4 bias torque terminal analog value Read Analog value of current voltage applied to terminal 4 C40 933 41933 Terminal 4 gain comma...

Page 781: ...F840 E1 FM type H46 H52 H2D H46 H38 H34 H30 H2D H45 H31 H20 H20 44002 Model Third and fourth characters Read 44003 Model Fifth and sixth characters Read 44004 Model Seventh and eighth characters Read 44005 Model Ninth and tenth characters Read 44006 Model Eleventh and twelfth characters Read 44007 Model Thirteenth and fourteenth characters Read 44008 Model Fifteenth and sixteenth characters Read 4...

Page 782: ...nge Description 541 N100 Frequency command sign selection 0 0 Frequency command without sign 1 Frequency command with sign 544 N103 CC Link extended setting 0 0 1 12 14 18 24 28 100 112 114 118 128 The function of the remote registers can be extended when the CC Link IE Field Network Basic is used Item Description Transmission speed 100 Mbps Communication method UDP IP Connectable units Master 1 S...

Page 783: ...ts 1 With 32768 to 32767 two s complement Tab 5 328 Setting the sign with Pr 541 Start command Sign of the frequency command Actual run command Forward rotation Forward rotation Reverse rotation Reverse rotation Reverse rotation Forward rotation Tab 5 329 Influence of the sign on the rotation direction NOTE When Pr 541 1 with sign When EEPROM write is specified with the RYE write mode error error ...

Page 784: ...th the quadruple setting of CC Link Ver 2 5 615 18 Compatible with the octuple setting of CC Link Ver 2 5 616 24 Compatible with the quadruple setting of CC Link Ver 2 5 615 28 Compatible with the octuple setting of CC Link Ver 2 5 616 100 Compatible with CC Link Ver 1 PLC function Refer to the PLC function programming manual 112 Compatible with the double setting of CC Link Ver 2 114 Compatible w...

Page 785: ...ut stop terminal MRS function 5 617 RYnA Start self holding selection terminal STOP function 5 617 RYnB Reset terminal RES function 5 617 RYnC Monitor command 5 617 RYnD Frequency setting command RAM 5 617 RYnE Frequency setting command RAM EEPROM 5 617 RYnF Instruction code execution request 5 617 RY n 1 0to RY n 1 7 Reserved RY n 1 8 Not used initial data process completion flag RY n 1 9 Not use...

Page 786: ...gisters read Address Description Refer to page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits RWwn Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1 5 619 RWwn 1 Set frequency 0 01 Hz increments 5 619 RWwn 2 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code 5 619 RWwn 3 Write data 5 619 Tab 5 335 Remote registers write Address Description Refer to page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits RWrn First monitor value 5 620 RWrn 1 Second monitor value 5 ...

Page 787: ... 5 619 RWwn 8 Faults history No H00 5 619 RWwn 9 PID set point 0 01 increments 5 619 RWwn A PID measured value 0 01 increments 5 619 RWwn B PID deviation 0 01 increments 5 619 RWwn C H00 Free RWwn D H00 Free RWwn E H00 Free RWwn F H00 Free Tab 5 339 Remote registers write Address Description Refer to page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits RWrn First monitor value 5 620 RWrn 1 Second monitor value 5 620 RW...

Page 788: ...ction code 5 619 RWwn 13 Write data 5 619 RWwn 14 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code 5 619 RWwn 15 Write data 5 619 RWwn 16 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code 5 619 RWwn 17 Write data 5 619 RWwn 18 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code 5 619 RWwn 19 Write data 5 619 RWwn 1A to RWwn 1F H00 Free Tab 5 341 Remote registers write Address Description Refer to page...

Page 789: ...al CS function RY9 Output stop terminal MRS function RYA Start self holding selection terminal STOP function RYB Reset RES terminal function RYC Monitor command When 1 is set in the monitor command RYC the monitored value is set in the remote register RWr0 1 4 to 7 and 1 is set in the monitoring RXC While 1 is set in the monitor command RYC the monitored data is always updated RYD Frequency settin...

Page 790: ...7 1 is set in this signal When 0 is set in the monitor command RYC 0 is set in this signal RXD Frequency setting completion RAM After 1 is set in the frequency setting command RYD and the frequency setting command is written to the inverter RAM 1 is set in this signal When 0 is set in the frequency setting command RYD 0 is set in this signal RXE Frequency setting completion RAM EEPROM After 1 is s...

Page 791: ...ode when required Set 1 in RYF after setting RWw2 and this register Set 0 when the write code is not required RWw4 Monitor code 3 Set the monitor code to be monitored By setting 1 in RYC after setting the specified monitored data is stored in RWr4 to RWr7 RWw5 Monitor code 4 RWw6 Monitor code5 RWw7 Monitor code 6 RWw8 Faults history No Set the number of previous faults you want to be able to read ...

Page 792: ...ply code corresponding to the instruction code RWw2 is set Refer to page 5 621 RWr3 Read data For a normal reply the reply data to the instruction specified by the instruction code is set RWr4 Third monitor value When 1 is set in RYC the monitored data specified by the monitor code RWw4 to 7 is saved RWr5 Fourth monitor value RWr6 Fifth monitor value RWr7 Sixth monitor value RWr8 Fault record faul...

Page 793: ...n mode H0002 Parameter selection error Unregistered code number was set H0003 Setting range error Set data is outside the permissible data range Reply code 1 H00 Normal No error normal completion of instruction code execution Reply code to RWr2 when Pr 544 0 H01 Write mode error Parameter write was attempted during operation other than a stop in the network operation mode H03 Frequency command set...

Page 794: ...tion number Read H73 H01 to HFF Selection of the monitored item monitor code Refer to monitor code page 5 624 Write HF3 Faults history Read H74 to H77 H0000 to HFFFF Two latest fault records Refer to page 6 5 for details on fault record read data Set frequency RAM Read H6D Read the set frequency speed from the RAM or EEPROM H0000 to HE678 Set frequency in 0 01Hz increments The display can be chang...

Page 795: ...ter clear Write HFC All parameters return to initial values Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be selected according to the data Parameter clear H9696 Communication parameters are cleared H5A5A Communication parameters are not cleared All parameter clear H9966 Communication parameters are cleared H55AA Communication parameters are not cleared For the details of whether or not to ...

Page 796: ...riptionsofmonitorcodes3 RWw4 to6 RWw7 canbeselected Monitor code Second monitor description first 8 bits First third to sixth monitor description last 8 bits Increments H00 Output frequency No monitoring monitor value is 0 0 01 Hz H01 Output frequency 0 01 Hz H02 Output current 0 01 A 0 1 A H03 Output voltage 0 1 V Tab 5 349 Codes for selecting monitor items NOTES The monitor codes from H01 and up...

Page 797: ...e monitoring function Monitoring the output frequency 5 629 Reading a parameter value Reading the value of Pr 7 Acceleration time 5 630 Writing a parameter value Setting 3 0 s in Pr 7 Acceleration time 5 631 Setting the running frequency running speed Setting to 50 00 Hz 5 632 Reading the fault records Reading the inverter faults 5 633 Inverter reset Perform inverter reset at an inverter alarm occ...

Page 798: ... 289 Remote registers Programmable controller CPU Remote device station 1 X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 RX0F to RX00 RY0F to RY00 Remote device station 2 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 RX1F to RX10 RY1F to RY10 RX0F to RX00 RX1F to RX10 RY0F to RY00 RY1F to RY10 Y100F to Y1000 Y101F to Y1010 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030 Y104F to Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 RWw0 W100 RWw1 W10...

Page 799: ...129E Fig 5 290 Programming example 1 Check the data link status of the station 1 Turn ON the signal Y00 of the output unit 0 SM1536 SD1536 0 SD1540 0 M0 4 M0 X1002 Y30 7 END 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b15 0 0 0 1 X F 0 0 1 X b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 RXF RX0 RX1F RX10 Station 1 to Remote input Inverter status Inverter status b0 During forward rotation b1 Reverse rotati...

Page 800: ...f instruction code execution is set to D2 Refer to page 5 621 I003130E Fig 5 291 Programming example 2 0 SM1536 SD1536 0 SD1540 0 M0 4 M0 X20 PLS M300 8 M300 SET M301 10 M301 X100F MOV H0FB W102 MOV H0 W103 SET Y100F RST M301 SET M302 19 M302 X100F MOV W2 D2 RST Y100F RST M302 25 END Check the data link status of the station 1 Write the operation mode write code HFB to RWw2 and the set data H0000 ...

Page 801: ...rogramming example 3 I003133E Fig 5 293 Programming example 4 0 SM1536 SD1536 0 SD1540 0 M0 4 M0 X20 Y1000 Y1003 8 END Check the data link status of the station 1 Forward rotation command RY00 Middle speed operation command RY03 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 b 5 1 b 0 0 0 1 Y F 0 0 1 Y b7 Station 1 RY0F to RY00 Run command Middle speed b6 Second function selection RT b7 Terminal 4 input select...

Page 802: ... the parameter assigned the number of 100 or higher change the link parameter extended set ting set it to other than H00 Refer to page A 5 for the settings 0 SM1536 SD1536 0 SD1540 0 M0 4 M0 X20 PLS M300 8 M300 SET M301 10 M301 X100F MOV H7 W102 SET Y100F RST M301 SET M302 17 M302 X100F MOV W3 D1 MOV W2 D2 RST Y100F RST M302 25 END Check the data link status of the station 1 Readtheaccelerationtim...

Page 803: ... parameter assigned the number of 100 or higher change the link parameter extended set ting set it to other than H00 Refer to page A 5 for the settings For other functions refer to the instruction codes on page 5 622 0 SM1536 SD1536 0 SD1540 0 M0 4 M0 X20 PLS M300 8 M300 SET M301 10 M301 X100F MOV H87 W102 MOV K30 W103 SET Y100F RST M301 SET M302 19 M302 X100F MOV W2 D2 RST Y100F RST M302 25 END C...

Page 804: ...m shown in fig 5 296 Frequency setting command Y100D Y100E Frequency setting completion X100D X100E 0 SM1536 SD1536 0 SD1540 0 M0 4 M0 X20 PLS M300 8 M300 SET M301 10 M301 X100D MOV K5000 W101 SET Y100D RST M301 SET M302 17 M302 X100D MOV W2 D2 RST Y100D RST M302 23 END Check the data link status of the station 1 Read the reply code RWr2 to output to D2 when the frequency setting completion RX0D t...

Page 805: ...t RYF with the instruction code HFD and data H9696 to reset the inverter set a value other than 0 in Pr 340 Communication startup mode selection or change the operation mode to the Network operation mode Refer to program example 2 on page 5 628 Refer to page 5 466 for operation conditions of inverter reset 0 SM1536 SD1536 0 SD1540 0 M0 4 M0 X20 PLS M300 8 M300 SET M301 10 M301 X100F MOV H74 W102 S...

Page 806: ...n once then reset the programmable controller When Pr 340 0 initial value any inverter whose main power is restored is reset to return to theExternaloperationmode ToresumetheNetworkoperation therefore settheoperationmode to the Network operation using the programmable controller program Set a value other than 0 in Pr 340 to start in the Network operation mode after inverter reset For the details o...

Page 807: ...9999 0 to 5 Set the station number for the inverter to inverter link function 9999 Inverter to inverter link function disabled 1125 N682 Number of inverters in inverter to inverter link system 2 2 to 6 Set the total number of inverters used for the inverter to inverter link function Item Description Transmission speed 100 Mbps Do not use the function at 10 Mbps Connectable units Master 1 Slave up ...

Page 808: ...on number the communication cannot be performed properly Set consecutive numbers for the station numbers Do not skip any numbers like 1 2 then 4 When Pr 1124 is set to a value equal to or larger than the value set in Pr 1125 normal communica tion is not available Use the Inverter to inverter linkup LNK signal to check that the master slave communication is established For the details of the LNK si...

Page 809: ...Inverter to inverter link input from slave 1 to master Y40 to Y4F Inverter to inverter link output from master to slave 1 X50 to X5F Inverter to inverter link input from slave 2 to master Y50 to Y5F Inverter to inverter link output from master to slave 2 X60 to X6F Inverter to inverter link input from slave 3 to master Y60 to Y6F Inverter to inverter link output from master to slave 3 X70 to X7F I...

Page 810: ...SD1501 Inverter to inverter link send data 1 to 8 slave 2 Data 1 to 8 sent to slave 2 SD1502 to SD1509 Inverter to inverter link receive data 1 to 8 slave 3 Data 1 to 8 received from slave 3 SD1510 to SD1517 Inverter to inverter link send data 1 to 8 slave 3 Data 1 to 8 sent to slave 3 SD1518 to SD1525 Inverter to inverter link receive data 1 to 8 slave 4 Data 1 to 8 received from slave 4 SD1526 t...

Page 811: ...bers are not consecutive Set Pr 1124 so that the station numbers are consecutive The specified number of inverters in the system is not correct Pr 1124 is set to a value equal to or larger than the value set in Pr 1125 Set Pr 1125 correctly The connection is half duplex Use full duplex connection When Pr 1426 Link speed and duplex mode selection 0 initial value check that the hub and the Ethernet ...

Page 812: ...Inverter to inverter link function FR F800 E Parameters 5 640 ...

Page 813: ...he fault output will not be retained Fault or alarm indication When a protective function activates the operation panel displays a fault indication Operation restart method While a protective function is activated the inverter output is kept shutoff Reset the inverter to restart the operation Tab 6 1 Behaviour when a protective function is activated Displayed item Description Error message A messa...

Page 814: ...lt occurs Refer to page 6 18 of the Instruction Manual for faults Switch the power OFF once then switch it ON again Turn ON the reset signal RES for 0 1 s or more If the RES signal is kept ON Err appears flickers to indicate that the inverter is in a reset status Fig 6 1 Resetting the inverter by using the operation panel I002451E Fig 6 2 Resetting the inverter by switching the power supply off an...

Page 815: ...ed and accumulated again from 0 I002453E Fig 6 4 Displaying the alarm list and the status values for the time of the alarm Monitor mode Faults history mode Parameter setting mode Faults history 1 Operation for displaying faults history Eight past faults can be displayed with the setting dial The latest fault is ended by Output frequency Flickering Output current Flickering Flickering Faults histor...

Page 816: ... the parameter setting mode The parameter number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number Turn until faults history clear appears Press to read the present set value initial value appears Faults history clear Turn to change the set value to Press to start clear and flicker alternately after parameters are cleared Turn to read another parameter Press to show the setting again Press tw...

Page 817: ...to a fault Operation panel indication Name Refer to page HOLD Operation panel lock 6 9 LOCD Password locked 6 9 to Er1 to Er4 Er8 Parameter write error 6 9 to to rE1 to rE4 rE6 to rE8 Copy operation error 6 10 Err Error 6 12 Tab 6 4 Error message Operation panel indication Name Refer to page OL Stall prevention overcurrent 6 13 oL Stall prevention overvoltage 6 14 TH Electronic thermal relay funct...

Page 818: ...voltage trip during acceleration 32 H20 6 19 E OV2 Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed 33 H21 6 20 E OV3 Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop 34 H22 6 20 E THT Inverter overload trip electronic thermal relay function 48 H30 6 20 E THM Motor overload trip electronic thermal relay function 49 H31 6 21 E FIN Heatsink overheat 64 H40 6 21 E IPF Instantaneous power ...

Page 819: ... fault 192 HC0 6 27 E 5 245 HF5 E 6 246 HF6 E 7 247 HF7 E CTE Operation panel power supply short circuit RS 485 terminal power supply short circuit 193 HC1 6 27 E P24 24 V DC power fault 194 HC2 6 27 E CDO Abnormal output current detection 196 HC4 6 28 E IOH Inrush current limit circuit fault 197 HC5 6 28 E SER Communication fault inverter 198 HC6 6 28 E AIE Analog input fault 199 HC7 6 28 E USB U...

Page 820: ...tive E PCH Pre charge fault 229 HE5 6 30 E PID PID signal fault 230 HE6 6 30 E EHR Ethernet communication fault 231 HE7 6 31 E 1 Option fault 241 HF1 6 31 E 2 242 HF2 E 3 243 HF3 Operation panel indication Name Refer to page E Faults history 6 3 EV 24 V external power supply operation 6 32 RD Backup in progress WR Restoration in progress Tab 6 8 Other messages Operation panel indication Name Data ...

Page 821: ...mpted while Pr 77 Parameter write selection is set to disable parameter write Overlapping range has been set for the frequency jump Overlapping range has been set for the adjustable 5 points V F The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication IPM parameter initialization was attempted while Pr 72 25 Check point Check the Pr 77 Parameter write selection setting Refer to page 5 72 Check the set...

Page 822: ... the USB memory device operation A copy operation writing was performed while the PLC function was in the RUN state A copy operation was attempted for a password locked project Check point Check if the USB memory device is operating Check if the PLC function is in the RUN state Check if the project data is locked with a password Corrective action Perform the operation after the USB memory device o...

Page 823: ...ameter verification The data in the inverter are different from the data in the USB memory device or the personal computer FR Configurator2 Check point Check the parameter setting of the source inverter against the setting of the destination inverter Corrective action Continue the verification by pressing SET key Perform parameter verification again Refer to page 5 572 The operation panel FR DU08 ...

Page 824: ...er to page 5 573 Operation panel indication rE8 Name No PLC function project file Description The specified PLC function project file does not exist in the USB memory device Check point Check that the file exists in the USB memory device Check that the folder name and the file name in the USB memory device is correct Corrective action The data in the USB memory device may be damaged Operation pane...

Page 825: ...on When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention level Pr 22 Stall prevention operation level etc this function stops the decrease in frequency until the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level this function decreases the frequency again Check point Ch...

Page 826: ...eds 85 of the preset level of Pr 9 Electronic thermal O L relay If the value reaches 100 of Pr 9 setting motor overload trip E THM occurs Check point Check for large load or sudden acceleration Check that the Pr 9 setting is appropriate Refer to page 5 150 Corrective action Reduce the load and frequency of operation Set an appropriate value in Pr 9 Refer to page 5 150 Operation panel indication PS...

Page 827: ...s the parameter set value Set the time until the MT is displayed using Pr 504 Maintenance timer 1 warning output set time MT1 Pr 687 Maintenance timer 2 warning output set time MT2 and Pr 689 Maintenance timer 3 warning output set time MT3 MT does not appear when the settings of Pr 504 Pr 687 and Pr 689 are initial values 9999 Check point The set time of maintenance timer has been exceeded Refer t...

Page 828: ...orrective action Inspect the equipment Set the load characteristics Pr 1481 to Pr 1487 correctly Operation panel indication EHR FR LU 08 EHR Name Ethernet communication fault FR F800 E only Description Appears when Ethernet communication is interrupted by physical factors while Pr 1431 Ethernet signal loss detection function selection 1 or 2 Check point Check that the Ethernet board is installed o...

Page 829: ...lection Refer to page 5 231 Operation panel indication FN FR LU08 FN Name Fan alarm Description For the inverter that contains a cooling fan FN appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to a fault low rotation speed or different operation from the setting of Pr 244 Cooling fan operation selection Check point Check the cooling fan for a failure Corrective action The fan may be f...

Page 830: ...utput short circuit does not occur Set 50 Hz in Pr 3 Base frequency Refer to page 5 537 Lower the stall prevention operation level Activate the fast response current limit operation Refer to page 5 180 Set the base voltage rated voltage of the motor etc in Pr 19 Base frequency voltage Refer to page 5 537 Choose inverter and motor capacities that match PM motor control Input a start command after t...

Page 831: ...ast response current limit operation Refer to page 5 180 Choose inverter and motor capacities that match PM motor control Input a start command after the motor stops Alternatively use the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure flying start function Refer to page 5 423 PM motor control Operation panel indication E OV1 FR LU08 OV During Acc Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during acce...

Page 832: ...ain circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system Check point Check for sudden speed reduction Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load inertia Corrective action Set the decele...

Page 833: ...assign the function by setting 26 positive logic or 126 negative logic from Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection Refer to page 5 231 Check point Check for too high surrounding air temperature Check for heatsink clogging Check that the cooling fan is not stopped Check that FN is not displayed on the operation panel Corrective action Set the surrounding air temperature to within the s...

Page 834: ...function is not available when Pr 872 is set to the initial value Pr 872 0 Refer to page 5 163 Check point Check for a break in the cable for the three phase power supply input Corrective action Wire the cables properly Repair a break portion in the cable Operation panel indication E OLT FR LU08 Stall prevention STP Name Stall prevention stop Description If the output frequency has fallen to 0 5 H...

Page 835: ...lt Name Upper limit fault detection Description When the load exceeds the upper limit fault detection range the inverter trips This protective function is not available in the initial setting of Pr 1490 Pr 1490 9999 Check point Check if too much load is applied to the equipment Check that the load characteristics settings are correct Corrective action Inspect the equipment Set the load characteris...

Page 836: ...N contacts open This function is available when 7 OH signal is set in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection This protective function is not available in the initial status OH signal is not assigned Check point Check for motor overheating Check that the value 7 OH signal is set correctly to any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection Corrective action Reduce the lo...

Page 837: ...the Instruction Manual of each option To apply the password lock when installing a communication option set Pr 296 0 100 Refer to page 5 76 Operation panel indication E OP1 FR LU08 Option1 Fault Name Communication option fault Description The inverter trips if a communication line error occurs in the communication option Check point Check for an incorrect option function setting and operation Chec...

Page 838: ...ommunication errors occurred consecutively for more than permissible number of retries when Pr 121 Number of PU communication retries 9999 during the RS 485 communication The inverter trips if communication is broken within the period of time set in Pr 122 PU communication check time interval during the RS 485 communication via the PU connector Check point Check that the operation panel or the par...

Page 839: ... for the RS 485 terminals are short circuited this function shuts off the power output At this time communication from the RS 485 terminals cannot be made To reset use STOP RESET key of the operation panel enter the RES signal or switch power OFF then ON again Check point Check that the PU connector cable is not shorted Check that the RS 485 terminals are connected correctly Corrective action Chec...

Page 840: ... Corrective action Configure a circuit where frequent power ON OFF is not repeated If the situation does not improve after taking the above measure please contact your sales representative Operation panel indication E SER FR LU08 VFD Comm error Name Communication fault inverter not for FR F800 E Description The inverter trips when communication error occurs consecutively for the permissible number...

Page 841: ...y stop function Check if the shorting wire between S1 and PC or between S2 and PC is disconnected when not using the safety stop function Corrective action When using the safety stop function check that wiring of terminal S1 S2 and SIC is correct and the safety stop input signal source such as a safety relay module is operating properly Refer to the Safety stop function instruction manual for caus...

Page 842: ...not too short Check that the Pr 763 setting is not too small Check that the Pr 127 PID control automatic switchover frequency setting is not too low Check for a break in the connection to the pump Corrective action Set the Pr 764 setting longer Set the Pr 763 setting larger Set the Pr 127 setting higher Check the connection to the pump Operation panel indication E PID FR LU08 PID signal fault Name...

Page 843: ...rk Basic is used check that the status bit of the cyclic transmission addressed to the own station is not OFF Corrective action Connect the Ethernet board securely Check that the Ethernet cable is correctly connected to the Ethernet connector Check that the Ethernet cable is not broken Set a larger value in Pr 1432 When excessive noise occurs around the inverter change the communication setting of...

Page 844: ... power supply Corrective action Turning ON the power supply main circuit of the inverter clears the indication If the indication is still displayed after turning ON of the power supply main circuit of the inverter the power supply voltage may be low or the jumper between the terminals P and P1 may be disconnected NOTES If protective functions with indication of Fault are activated when using the F...

Page 845: ... P and P1 When using a DC reactor FR HEL remove the jumper across P to P1 and then connect the DC reactor Connect the DC reactor securely when required according to the capacity 2 34 2 80 Input signal Start signal is not input Check the start command source and input a start signal PU operation mode FWD key REV key External operation mode STF STR signal 5 121 Both the forward and reverse rotation ...

Page 846: ...the wiring Use the Start self holding selection STP STOP signal when the three wire type is used 5 293 Parameter setting Under V F control Pr 0 Torque boost setting is improper Increase the Pr 0 setting by 0 5 increments while observing the rotation of a motor If that makes no difference decrease the setting 5 535 Pr 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection is set Check the Pr 78 setting Set Pr 78...

Page 847: ...fter instantaneous power failure function or power failure stop function has been activated Performing overload operation during input phase loss may cause voltage insufficiency and that may result in detection of power failure Set Pr 872 Input phase loss protection selection 1 input phase failure protection active Disable the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function and power ...

Page 848: ...nce occurs output frequency Set Pr 31 to Pr 36 Pr 552 Frequency jump When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped 5 178 Resonance occurs carrier frequency Change Pr 72 PWM frequency selection setting Changing the PWM carrier frequency produces an effect on avoiding the resonance frequency...

Page 849: ... voltage U V W are unbalanced Check the output voltage of the inverter Check the insulation of the motor 7 7 Parameter setting Pr 71 Applied motor setting is incorrect Check the Pr 71 Applied motor setting 5 297 Motor current is large Refer to 6 6 11 Motor current is too large 6 40 Check points Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to page Main circuit Phase sequence of output terminals U V and W is...

Page 850: ...rip E OC is likely to occur 5 180 Motor Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor Check points Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to page Parameter setting Acceleration deceleration time is too short Increase the acceleration deceleration time 5 102 Torque boost Pr 0 Pr 46 setting is improper under V F control so the stall prevention function is activated Increase decrease the Pr 0 Torqu...

Page 851: ...s chattering Parameter setting Fluctuation of power supply voltage is too large Under V F control change the Pr 19 Base frequency voltage setting approximately by 3 5 537 Pr 80 Motor capacity and Pr 81 Number of motor poles are not appropriate for the motor capacity under Advanced magnetic flux vector control or PM motor control Check the settings of Pr 80 and Pr 81 5 41 Wiring length exceeds 30 m...

Page 852: ...r to page Main circuit Power is not input Input the power 2 25 Control circuit Front cover Operation panel is not properly connected to the inverter Check if the inverter front cover is installed securely 2 12 Check points Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to page Parameter setting Torque boost Pr 0 Pr 46 setting is improper under V F control so the stall prevention function is activated Increas...

Page 853: ...ed maximum frequency 5 176 5 266 Torque boost Pr 0 Pr 46 setting is improper under V F control so the stall prevention function is activated Increase decrease the Pr 0 Torque boost setting value by 0 5 increments so that stall prevention does not occur 5 535 V F pattern is improper when V F control is performed Pr 3 Pr 14 Pr 19 Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr 3 Base frequency Use Pr 19 Base...

Page 854: ...7 Parameter write selection setting Check the Pr 77 setting 5 72 Key lock mode is enabled by the Pr 161 Frequency setting key lock operation selection setting Check the Pr 161 setting 5 69 Operation mode and a writing device do not correspond Check Pr 79 Pr 338 Pr 339 Pr 550 and Pr 551 and select an operation mode suitable for the purpose 5 119 5 130 Pr 72 PWM frequency selection was attempted to ...

Page 855: ...Periodic inspection Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection Consult us for periodic inspection Check and clean the cooling system Clean the air filter etc Check the tightening and retighten The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration temperature changes etc Check and tighten them Tighten them according to the specified tighten ing torque Refer to ...

Page 856: ...or breakage and deterioration crack discoloration etc 2 Contact the manufacturer Transformer reactor Check for unusual odor and abnormal increase of whining sound 2 Stop the equipment and contact the manufacturer Terminal block Check for a damage 2 Stop the equipment and contact the manufacturer Smoothing aluminium electrolytic capacitor 1 Check for liquid leakage 2 Contact the manufacturer 2 Chec...

Page 857: ...r loose screws and bolts 2 Fix with the fan cover fixing screws 3 Check for stain 2 Clean Heatsink 1 Check for clogging 2 Clean 2 Check for stain 2 Clean Display Indication 1 Check that display is normal 2 Contact the manufacturer 2 Check for stain 2 Clean Meter Check that reading is normal 2 Stop the equipment and contact the manufacturer Load motor Operation check Check for vibration and abnorma...

Page 858: ... not indicate At the time of electric continuity the measured value is several Ω to several tens of Ω If all measured values are almost the same although these values are not constant depending on the module type and tester type the modules are without fault Fig 7 1 Module device numbers and terminals to be checked I001305E Tester polarity Result Tester polarity Result Converter module D1 R L1 P D...

Page 859: ...n for when the yearly average surrounding air temperature is 40 C Without corrosive gas flammable gas oil mist dust and dirt etc Output current 80 of the inverter rating NOTES Do not use solvent such as acetone benzene toluene and alcohol as these will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off The display etc of the operation panel and the parameter unit are vulnerable to detergent and alcohol ...

Page 860: ...di cation of replacement time The life warning output can be used as a guideline for life judgment Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity refer to page 5 94 for details Parts Judgment level Main circuit capacitor 85 of the initial capacity Control circuit capacitor Estimated remaining life 10 Inrush current limit circuit Estimated remaining life 10 Power ON 100 000 times left Coo...

Page 861: ...Push the hooks from above and remove the fan cover Disconnect the fan connectors Remove the fan I001306E Fig 7 2 Removal of the fan cover I002454E Fig 7 3 Removal of the fan FR F820 00105 2 2K to 00250 5 5K FR F840 00083 3 7K 00126 5 5K FR F820 00340 7 5K to 01540 37K FR F840 00170 7 5K to 00770 37K FR F820 01870 45K or higher FR F840 00930 45K to 03610 160K The number of cooling fans differs acco...

Page 862: ...the fan connectors Fig 7 4 Orientation of the fan I002456E I002455E Fig 7 5 Connection of the fan AIRFLOW FR F820 00105 2 2K to 00250 5 5K FR F840 00083 3 7K 00126 5 5K FR F820 00340 7 5K to 00770 18 5K FR F840 00170 7 5K to 00380 18 5K FR F820 01540 37K FR F840 00770 37K FR F820 00930 22K 01250 30K FR F840 00470 22K 00620 30K FR F820 01870 45K 02330 55K FR F840 00930 45K to 01800 75K FR F820 0316...

Page 863: ...I002457E I002458E I002459E Fig 7 6 Reinstall the fan cover I002809E Fig 7 7 Removal of the fan FR F840 04320 185K or higher FR F820 01870 45K or higher FR F840 00930 45K to 03610 160K FR F820 00340 7 5K to 01540 37K FR F840 00170 7 5K to 00770 37K FR F820 00105 2 2K to 00250 5 5K FR F840 00083 3 7K 00126 5 5K Insert hooks into holes Insert hooks until you hear a click sound The number of cooling f...

Page 864: ...Check for external crack discoloration liquid leakage etc Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80 of the rating Relays To prevent a contact fault etc relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times switching life Main circuit fuse inside the inverter FR F840 04320 185K or higher A fuse is used insid...

Page 865: ...s cannot be removed Slide down the control circuit terminal block to remove it Be careful not to bend the pins of the inverter s control circuit connector reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it with the mounting screws I002460E Fig 7 9 Removal of the terminal block I002461E Fig 7 10 Reinstallation of the terminal block NOTE Before starting inverter replacement switch power OFF wai...

Page 866: ... the inverter output side When the inverter to motor wiring length is large especially in the 400 V class small capacity models the meters and CTs may generate heat due to line to line leakage current Therefore choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the current rating To measure and display the output voltage and output current of the inverter it is recommended to use the terminal AM ...

Page 867: ... phases is 10 or lower of the inverter rated current Output side power P2 U V W and across U and V V and W Digital power meter for inverter or electrodynamic type single phase wattmeter P2 W21 W22 2 wattmeter method or 3 wattmeter method Output side power factor Pf2 Calculate in similar manner to power supply side power factor Converter output Across P and N Moving coil type such as tester Inverte...

Page 868: ...rts insidethe instrument leading to burnout In this case use an approximate effective value type When the setting of Pr 195 ABC1 terminal function selection is the positive logic A digital power meter designed for inverter can also be used to measure Fault signal Across A1 and C1 Across B1 and C1 Moving coil type such as tester Continuity check Normal Fault Across A1 and C1 Discontinuity Continuit...

Page 869: ...ntmeasuring sideorwhenthe metercontains aPTonthe voltage measurementside anerrorwill alsobeproduced due to the frequency characteristics of the CT and PT I001301E I001302E Fig 7 12 Differences when measuring power with different instruments Example of measuring inverter input power Example of measuring inverter output power 3 wattmeter method Electro dynamometer type 2 wattmeter method Electro dyn...

Page 870: ...lt meter A needle type tester cannot be used to measure the output side voltage as it indicates a value much greater than the actual value A moving iron type meter indicates an effective value which includes harmonics and therefore the value is larger than that of the fundamental wave Thevaluemonitoredontheoperationpanelistheinverter controlledvoltageitself Hence thatvalue is accurate and it is re...

Page 871: ...er is used always use an effective value detection type A mean value detection type produces a large error and may indicate an extremely smaller value than the actual value The value monitored on the operation panel is accurate if the output frequency varies and it is rec ommended to monitor values provide analog output using the operation panel Examples of measured value differences produced by d...

Page 872: ...r during deceleration for example the converter output voltage rises to nearly 400 V DC to 450 V DC 800 V DC to 900 V DC for the 400 V class maximum 7 2 7 Measurement of inverter output frequency In the initial setting of the FM type inverter a pulse train proportional to the output frequency is out put across the pulse train output terminals FM and SD of the inverter This pulse train output can b...

Page 873: ...500 V DC megger 7 2 9 Pressure test Do not conduct a pressure test Deterioration may occur I002463E Fig 7 14 Insulation resistance test NOTES Before performing the insulation resistance test on the external circuit disconnect the cables from all terminals of the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter For the continuity test of the control circuit use a tester high resista...

Page 874: ...Measurement of main circuit voltages currents and powers Precautions for maintenance and inspection 7 20 ...

Page 875: ...12 288 346 432 Overload current rating SLD 110 60 s 120 3 s inverse time characteristics at surrounding air temperature of 40 C LD 120 60 s 150 3 s inverse time characteristics at surrounding air temperature of 50 C Rated voltage Three phase 200 to 240 V Power supply Rated input AC voltage frequency Three phase 200 to 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 170 to 264 V 50 Hz 60 Hz Pe...

Page 876: ...5 1 89 7 106 130 144 180 216 Power supply capacity kVA SLD 2 5 4 1 5 9 8 3 12 17 24 31 37 44 59 74 88 107 137 165 198 LD 2 3 3 7 5 5 7 7 12 17 24 29 34 41 57 68 81 99 110 137 165 Protective structure IEC 60529 Enclose type IP20 Open type IP00 Cooling system Self cooling Forced air cooling Approx mass kg 2 5 2 5 2 5 3 0 3 0 6 3 6 3 8 3 8 3 15 15 23 41 41 43 52 55 Tab 8 2 Specifications FR F840 0002...

Page 877: ...oltage does not exceed the power supply voltage The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range However the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about 2 The rated input current indicates a value at a rated output voltage The impedance at the power supply side including those of the input reactor and cables af...

Page 878: ...0 45K 01160 55K Continuous characteristic Rated output kW 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 Rated torque Nm 4 77 9 55 14 23 6 35 47 7 70 95 5 118 140 191 236 286 350 Rated speed r min 1500 Maximum speed r min 2250 Number of poles 6 8 Maximum torque 120 6 s Frame No 80M 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180L 200L 225S Inertia moment J 10 4 kg m 20 40 55 110 275 280 760 770 170...

Page 879: ...the rated speed of 1800 r min The torque characteristic is when the armature winding temperature is 20 C and the input volt age to the inverter is 200 V AC or 400 V AC Constant speed operation cannot be performed for the speed of 150 r min or less The standard model MM EFS 1M or MM EFS 1M4 with an 11 kW or higher capacity is designed for a direct connection only 0 150 500 1800 0 140 120 100 60 80 ...

Page 880: ...3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 Rated torque Nm 2 39 4 77 7 0 11 8 17 5 23 9 35 0 47 7 Rated speed r min 3000 Maximum speed r min 4000 Number of poles 6 Maximum torque 120 6s Frame No 80M 90L 112M 132S 160M Inertia moment J 10 4 kg m 10 7 22 4 29 8 68 3 198 534 Rated current A 200 V class 3 2 6 1 8 4 14 3 21 4 28 7 37 6 51 4 400 V class 1 6 3 1 4 2 7 2 10 7 14 4 18 8 25 7 Structure Totally enclosed fan cooled m...

Page 881: ... specification NOTES The torque characteristic is when the armature winding temperature is 20 C and the input volt age to the inverter is 200 V AC or 400 V AC Constant speed operation cannot be performed for the speed of 300 r min or less The MM EFS 3 or MM EFS 34 motor with an 11 kW or higher capacity is designed for a direct connection only 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 3 3000 1800 0 0 2 4 0 0 6 0 140 120 100 6...

Page 882: ...6 Maximum torque 120 60 s Frame No 250MA 250MA 250MD 280MD Inertia moment J 10 4 kg m 6000 6000 10000 17500 20500 23250 Rated current A 270 135 170 195 230 280 Structure Totally enclosed fan cooled motor With steel framed legs protective structure IP44 Insulation class F class Vibration class V 25 Environment Surrounding air temperature humidity 10 C to 40 C non freezing 90 RH or less non condensi...

Page 883: ...n specification NOTES The motor can also be used for applications which require the rated speed of 1800 r min The torque characteristic is when the armature winding temperature is 20 C and the input volt age to the inverter is 200 V AC or 400 V AC Constant speed operation cannot be performed for the speed of 150 r min or less 0 150 500 1800 0 140 120 100 60 80 40 20 300 900 1200 1500 Speed r min S...

Page 884: ...or the parameter unit Four digit BCD or 16 bit binary when used with option FR A8AX Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self holding input 3 wire input can be selected Input signals twelve terminals Low speed operation command Middle speed operation command High speed operation command Second function selection Terminal 4 input selection Jog operation selection Outp...

Page 885: ...unction Heatsink overheat Instantaneous power failure Undervoltage Input phase loss Stall prevention stop Loss of synchronism detection Upper limit fault detection Lower limit fault detection Brake transistor alarm detection Output side earth ground fault overcurrent Output short circuit Output phase loss External thermal relay operation PTC thermistor operation Option fault Communication option f...

Page 886: ...75K FR F820 00077 1 5K NOTE The following outline dimensions of the frequency inverter models are valid for all types except otherwise stated I002469E Fig 8 4 Dimensions FR F820 00046 0 75K FR F820 00077 1 5K 6 95 110 7 5 245 7 5 260 1 5 7 5 5 D1 D Inverter model D D1 FR F820 00046 0 75K 110 20 FR F820 00077 1 5K 125 35 Unit mm 2 6 hole ...

Page 887: ...5K 00038 1 5K 00052 2 2K 00083 3 7K 00126 5 5K I002470E Fig 8 5 Dimensions FR F820 00105 2 2K 00167 3 7K 00250 5 5K FR F840 00023 0 75K 00038 1 5K 00052 2 2K 00083 3 7K 00126 5 5K 150 5 140 1 5 245 7 5 260 45 5 7 5 6 12 5 125 FR F840 00023 0 75K to00052 2 2K are not provided with a cooling fan Unit mm 2 6 hole FAN ...

Page 888: ...E_B Fig 8 6 Dimensions FR F820 00340 7 5K 00490 11K 00630 15K FR F840 00170 7 5K 00250 11K 00310 15K 00380 18 5K 6 195 220 7 5 H1 7 5 H2 H 2 3 D1 12 5 D Unit mm Inverter model H H1 H2 D D1 FR F820 00340 7 5K 00490 11K FR F840 00170 7 5K 00250 11K 260 245 1 5 170 84 FR F820 00630 15K FR F840 00310 15K 00380 18 5K 300 285 3 190 101 5 2 6 hole FAN ...

Page 889: ...s FR F800 8 15 FR F820 00770 18 5K 00930 22K 01250 30K FR F840 00470 22K 00620 30K I002472E Fig 8 7 Dimensions FR F820 00770 18 5K 00930 22K 01250 30K FR F840 00470 22K 00620 30K 250 230 10 10 1 5 380 10 400 2 3 190 93 3 10 Unit mm 2 10 hole ...

Page 890: ...n drawings Specifications 8 16 FR F820 01540 37K FR F840 00770 37K I002473E_D Fig 8 8 Dimensions FR F820 01540 37K FR F840 00770 37K 10 325 270 10 550 10 530 3 2 15 520 15 195 17 Unit mm 2 10 hole 4 20 hole for hanging ...

Page 891: ... 90K 02600 110K 03250 132K 03610 160K W 12 W1 10 H1 15 H 3 2 D 18 H2 18 D1 Unit mm 2 12 hole 4 d hole FAN Inverter model W W1 H H1 H2 d D D1 FR F820 01870 45K 02330 55K FR F840 00930 45K 01160 55K 01800 75K 435 380 550 525 514 25 250 24 FR F820 03160 75K 465 410 700 675 664 25 250 22 FR F820 03800 90K 04750 110K 465 400 740 715 704 24 360 22 FR F840 02160 90K 02600 110K 465 400 620 595 584 24 300 ...

Page 892: ...8 18 FR F840 04320 185K 04810 220K I002811E Fig 8 10 Dimensions FR F840 04320 185K 04810 220K 12 200 498 10 985 15 1010 3 2 380 13 984 13 22 200 Unit mm 3 12 hole 4 16 hole FAN Always connect a DC reactor FR HEL which is available as an option ...

Page 893: ... F840 05470 250K 06100 280K 06830 315K I002812E Fig 8 11 Dimensions FR F840 05470 250K 06100 280K 06830 315K 300 680 12 300 13 984 13 1010 3 2 380 13 984 13 22 Unit mm 3 12 hole 4 16 hole FAN Always connect a DC reactor FR HEL which is available as an option ...

Page 894: ...5 21 5 22 20 Outline dimensions Enclosure cut dimensions Unit mm 3 2 2 M3 screw Panel 120 Operation panel connection cable FR CB2 option Operation panel connection connector FR ADP option Denotes the space required to connect an optional operation panel connection cable FR CB2 When using another cable leave the space required for the cable specification Operation panel ...

Page 895: ... 5 F 50 62 5 70 70 70 89 105 127 120 5 139 5 H 166 191 203 5 226 265 265 316 316 359 359 KA 39 5 53 65 69 75 94 105 127 127 146 KD 27 27 27 27 27 27 56 56 56 56 KG 63 76 88 103 120 120 142 142 168 168 KL 145 158 169 180 197 197 266 266 289 289 M 160 175 200 230 256 256 310 310 335 335 N 125 150 180 180 180 218 254 298 285 323 XB 50 56 63 70 89 89 108 108 121 121 Q 40 50 60 60 80 80 110 110 110 110...

Page 896: ...F 152 5 143 H 401 446 KA 145 145 KG 472 517 KP 548 593 M 390 428 N 361 342 XB 133 149 R 425 5 432 S Ø60m6 Ø65m6 T 11 11 U 7 7 W 18 18 Tab 8 9 Dimensions table Unit mm MM EFS 1500 r min specification 37 K to 55K NOTES The drawings shown above are sample outline dimension drawings The outer appearance may differ depending on the frame number C C R B A KA F F N XB 70 E E M 140 110 11 C 0 0 5 H KG φ 9...

Page 897: ...0 70 105 H 166 191 226 265 316 KA 39 5 53 69 75 105 KD 27 27 27 27 56 KG 63 76 103 120 142 KL 145 158 180 197 266 M 160 175 230 256 310 N 125 150 180 180 254 XB 50 56 70 89 108 Q 40 50 60 80 110 QK 32 40 45 63 90 R 140 168 5 200 239 323 S Ø19j6 Ø24j6 Ø28j6 Ø38k6 Ø42k6 T 6 7 7 8 8 U 3 5 4 4 5 5 W 6 8 8 10 12 X 15 15 4 4 4 Z 9 9 12 12 14 5 Tab 8 10 Dimensions table Unit mm MM EFS 3000 r min specific...

Page 898: ...0 kW I003081E 110 kW 132 kW 160 kW I003082E Fig 8 16 Dimensions MM THE4 L A R B KA Q QK K2 K F K K1 F N W S T U D H KG C G J E E M XB 4 ØZ hole HOLES L A R B KA Q QK K2 K2 F K K1 F N W S T U D H KG C G J E E M XB 4 ØZ hole HOLES L A R B KA Q QK K2 K2 F K K1 F XB N W S T U D H KG C G J E E M 4 ØZ hole HOLES ...

Page 899: ...157 5 210 5 KG 583 603 673 K 168 130 130 K1 50 168 181 K2 50 50 40 L 932 1028 1166 M 486 486 560 N 449 449 499 Z 24 24 24 XB 168 168 190 Q 140 140 170 QK 110 110 140 R 482 5 482 5 569 5 S 75m6 75m6 85m6 T 12 12 14 U 7 5 7 5 9 W 20 20 22 Tab 8 11 Dimensions table Unit mm MM THE4 NOTES The drawings shown above are sample outline dimension drawings The outer appearance may differ depending on the fra...

Page 900: ...Outline dimension drawings Specifications 8 26 ...

Page 901: ... P N P1 Same except for the 400 V class 01800 75K FR F740 P 01800 75K M10 FR F840 01800 75K M8 Screws for earthing grounding Same except for the 200 V class 03160 75K FR F720 P 03160 75K M10 FR F820 03160 75K M8 Control circuit terminal block Removable terminal block screw type Removable terminal block spring clamp type Terminal response level The FR F800 s I O terminals have better response level...

Page 902: ...tion are not available Copying parameter settings TheFR F700 P series parametersettingscanbeeasilycopiedtotheFR F800seriesbyusingthesetup software FR Configurator2 Not supported by the setup software FR SW3 SETUP or older A 1 2 Replacement of the FR F500 L series Installation precautions Installation size is compatible for replacing the FR F520 L 0 75K 2 2K 3 7K 7 5K 18 5K 22K 37K 45K 90K 110K FR ...

Page 903: ... specification 200 Hz MM THE4 90 Hz 590 Hz 17700 r min with 4P Set the upper limit frequency Pr 0 Pr 18 according to the motor and machine specifications Permissible load 120 60 s 150 3 s inverse time characteristics The value is a ratio to the rated motor current 120 60 s 150 3 s inverse time characteristics The value is a ratio to the inverter rated current Maximum starting torque 50 120 Advance...

Page 904: ...erns of 2 kHz 6 kHz 10 kHz and 14 kHz Selectable between 0 75 kHz to 14 5 kHz Two patterns of 2 kHz and 6 kHz 0 75 kHz to 6 kHz Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure No startup waiting time Using the regeneration avoidance function or retry function together is recommended Startup waiting time exists Startup delay Startup delay of about 0 1 s for initial tuning No startup delay Drivi...

Page 905: ... FR A8NC FR A8NCE FR A8ND FR A8NP NOTE When a communication option is installed parameter clear lock release during password lock Pr 297 9999 can be performed only from the communication option Pr Name Instruction code Control method Parameter Read Write Extended Copy Clear All clear 0 Torque boost 00 80 0 x x 1 Maximum frequency 01 81 0 2 Minimum frequency 02 82 0 3 Base frequency 03 83 0 x x 4 M...

Page 906: ...2B AB 0 44 Second acceleration deceleration time 2C AC 0 45 Second deceleration time 2D AD 0 46 Second torque boost 2E AE 0 x x 47 Second V F base frequency 2F AF 0 x x 48 Second stall prevention operation level 30 B0 0 x 49 Second stall prevention operation frequency 31 B1 0 x 50 Second output frequency detection 32 B2 0 51 Second electronic thermal O L relay 33 B3 0 52 Operation panel main monit...

Page 907: ...g setting status 60 E0 0 x x 100 V F1 first frequency 00 80 1 x x 101 V F1 first frequency voltage 01 81 1 x x 102 V F2 second frequency 02 82 1 x x 103 V F2 second frequency voltage 03 83 1 x x 104 V F3 third frequency 04 84 1 x x 105 V F3 third frequency voltage 05 85 1 x x 106 V F4 fourth frequency 06 86 1 x x 107 V F4 fourth frequency voltage 07 87 1 x x 108 V F5 fifth frequency 08 88 1 x x 10...

Page 908: ...tall prevention level at 10 V input 31 B1 1 x 150 Output current detection level 32 B2 1 151 Output current detection signal delay time 33 B3 1 152 Zero current detection level 34 B4 1 153 Zero current detection time 35 B5 1 154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation 36 B6 1 x 155 RT signal function validity condition selection 37 B7 1 156 Stall prevention operation selectio...

Page 909: ...unction selection 1F 9F 2 x 192 IPF terminal function selection 20 A0 2 x 193 OL terminal function selection 21 A1 2 x 194 FU terminal function selection 22 A2 2 x 195 ABC1 terminal function selection 23 A3 2 x 196 ABC2 terminal function selection 24 A4 2 x 232 Multi speed setting speed 8 28 A8 2 233 Multi speed setting speed 9 29 A9 2 234 Multi speed setting speed 10 2A AA 2 235 Multi speed setti...

Page 910: ...A CA 2 267 Terminal 4 input selection 4B CB 2 x 268 Monitor decimal digits selection 4C CC 2 269 Parameter for manufacturer setting Do not set 289 Inverter output terminal filter 61 E1 2 x 290 Monitor negative output selection 62 E2 2 291 Pulse train I O selection 63 E3 2 x 294 UV avoidance voltage gain 66 E6 2 295 Frequency change increment amount setting 67 E7 2 296 Password lock level 68 E8 2 x...

Page 911: ...ommunication retry count 23 A3 3 336 RS 485 communication check time interval 24 A4 3 337 RS 485 communication waiting time setting 25 A5 3 338 Communication operation command source 26 A6 3 339 Communication speed command source 27 A7 3 340 Communication startup mode selection 28 A8 3 341 RS 485 communication CR LF selection 29 A9 3 342 Communication EEPROM write selection 2A AA 3 343 Communicati...

Page 912: ...waiting time 00 80 5 501 Communication error occurrence count display 01 81 5 x 502 Stop mode selection at communication error 02 82 5 503 Maintenance timer 1 03 83 5 x x x 504 Maintenance timer 1 warning output set time 04 84 5 x 505 Speed setting reference 05 85 5 514 Emergency drive dedicated waiting time 0E 8E 5 x 515 Emergency drive dedicated retry count 0F 8F 5 x 522 Output stop frequency 16...

Page 913: ...580 MC switching interlock time 50 D0 5 581 Start waiting time 51 D1 5 582 Auxiliary motor connection time deceleration time 52 D2 5 583 Auxiliary motor disconnection time acceleration time 53 D3 5 584 Auxiliary motor 1 starting frequency 54 D4 5 585 Auxiliary motor 2 starting frequency 55 D5 5 586 Auxiliary motor 3 starting frequency 56 D6 5 587 Auxiliary motor 1 stopping frequency 57 D7 5 588 Au...

Page 914: ... output level 3F BF 6 665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 41 C1 6 668 Power failure stop frequency gain 44 C4 6 673 SF PR slip amount adjustment operation selection 49 C9 6 x x 674 SF PR slip amount adjustment gain 4A CA 6 x x 684 Tuning data unit switchover 54 D4 6 x 686 Maintenance timer 2 56 D6 6 x x x 687 Maintenance timer 2 warning output set time 57 D7 6 x 688 Maintenance timer 3 58 D8...

Page 915: ...egral time 39 B9 7 758 Second PID differential time 3A BA 7 759 PID unit selection 3B BB 7 760 Pre charge fault selection 3C BC 7 761 Pre charge ending level 3D BD 7 762 Pre charge ending time 3E BE 7 763 Pre charge upper detection level 3F BF 7 764 Pre charge time limit 40 C0 7 765 Second pre charge fault selection 41 C1 7 766 Second pre charge ending level 42 C2 7 767 Second pre charge ending ti...

Page 916: ...al 1 function assignment 44 C4 8 x x 869 Current output filter 45 C5 8 870 Speed detection hysteresis 46 C6 8 872 Input phase loss protection selection 48 C8 8 874 OLT level setting 4A CA 8 x x 882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection 52 D2 8 883 Regeneration avoidance operation level 53 D3 8 884 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity 54 D4 8 885 Regeneration avoidance ...

Page 917: ...ias speed 11 91 9 x x x x C14 918 Terminal 1 gain frequency speed 12 92 9 x x x x C15 918 Terminal 1 gain speed 12 92 9 x x x x C16 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque 13 93 9 x x x x C17 919 Terminal 1 bias torque 13 93 9 x x x x C18 920 Terminal 1 gain command torque 14 94 9 x x x x C19 920 Terminal 1 gain torque 14 94 9 x x x x C8 930 Current output bias signal 1E 9E 9 C9 930 Current output bias...

Page 918: ...ral stop selection at limited frequency 0F 8F A 1016 PTC thermistor protection detection time 10 90 A x 1018 Monitor with sign selection 12 92 A 1019 Analog meter voltage negative output selection 13 93 A 1020 Trace operation selection 14 94 A 1021 Trace mode selection 15 95 A 1022 Sampling cycle 16 96 A 1023 Number of analog channels 17 97 A 1024 Sampling auto start 18 98 A 1025 Trigger mode sele...

Page 919: ...icient 26 A6 B x 1139 Second PID display gain analog value 27 A7 B x 1140 Second PID set point deviation input selection 28 A8 B 1141 Second PID measured value input selection 29 A9 B 1142 Second PID unit selection 2A AA B 1143 Second PID upper limit 2B AB B 1144 Second PID lower limit 2C AC B 1145 Second PID deviation limit 2D AD B 1146 Second PID signal operation selection 2E AE B 1147 Second ou...

Page 920: ... 54 D4 B 1185 User parameters 36 55 D5 B 1186 User parameters 37 56 D6 B 1187 User parameters 38 57 D7 B 1188 User parameters 39 58 D8 B 1189 User parameters 40 59 D9 B 1190 User parameters 41 5A DA B 1191 User parameters 42 5B DB B 1192 User parameters 43 5C DC B 1193 User parameters 44 5D DD B 1194 User parameters 45 5E DE B 1195 User parameters 46 5F DF B 1196 User parameters 47 60 E0 B 1197 Us...

Page 921: ...9 PID input pressure fault level 4F CF D 1380 PID input pressure warning set point change amount 50 D0 D 1381 PID input pressure fault operation selection 51 D1 D 1460 PID multistage set point 1 3C BC E 1461 PID multistage set point 2 3D BD E 1462 PID multistage set point 3 3E BE E 1463 PID multistage set point 4 3F BF E 1464 PID multistage set point 5 40 C0 E 1465 PID multistage set point 6 41 C1...

Page 922: ...6 E 1487 Load characteristics minimum frequency 57 D7 E 1488 Upper limit warning detection width 58 D8 E 1489 Lower limit warning detection width 59 D9 E 1490 Upper limit fault detection width 5A DA E 1491 Lower limit fault detection width 5B DB E 1492 Load status detection signal delay time load reference measurement waiting time 5C DC E Pr Name Instruction code Control method Parameter Read Writ...

Page 923: ...age 5 610 for the details of the CC Link IE Field Network Basic Pr Name Instruction code Control method Parameter Read Write Extended Copy Clear All clear 1124 Station number in inverter to inverter link 18 98 B 1125 Number of inverters in inverter to inverter link system 19 99 B 1424 Ethernet communication network number 18 98 E 1425 Ethernet communication station number 19 99 E 1426 Link speed a...

Page 924: ... 2 32 B2 E 1451 Ethernet command source selection IP address 3 33 B3 E 1452 Ethernet command source selection IP address 4 34 B4 E 1453 Ethernet command source selection IP address 3 range specification 35 B5 E 1454 Ethernet command source selection IP address 4 range specification 36 B6 E 1455 Keepalive time 37 B7 E Pr Name Instruction code Control method Parameter Read Write Extended Copy Clear ...

Page 925: ...er 0 01kW 0 1kW unsigned R H000E Output power 0 01kW 0 1kW unsigned R H000F Input terminal status R H0010 Output terminal status R H0011 Load meter 0 1 unsigned R H0012 Motor excitation current 0 01 A 0 1 A unsigned R H0013 reserved H0014 Cumulative energization time 1 h unsigned R H0015 reserved H0016 Orientation status 1 unsigned R H0017 Actual operation time 1 h unsigned R H0018 Motor load fact...

Page 926: ...3 PID measured value 2 0 1 unsigned R H0044 2nd PID set point 0 1 unsigned R W H0045 2nd PID measured value 0 1 unsigned R W H0046 2nd PID deviation 0 1 unsigned R W H0048 to H004F reserved H0050 Integrated power on time R H0051 Running time R H0052 Saving energy monitor R H0053 reserved H0054 Fault code 1 R H0055 Fault code 2 R H0056 Fault code 3 R H0057 Fault code 4 R H0058 Fault code 5 R H0059 ...

Page 927: ...g frequency 16 31bit H0205 Motor rotation 0 15bit 1 r min signed R H0206 Motor rotation 16 31bit H0207 Load meter 0 15bit 0 1 signed R H0208 Load meter 16 31bit H0209 H020A reserved H020B Watt hour meter 1kWh step 0 15bit 1 kWh unsigned R H020C Watt hour meter 1kWh step 16 31bit H020D Watt hour meter 0 1 0 01kWh step 0 15bit 0 1 0 01 kWh unsigned R H020E Watt hour meter 0 1 0 01kWh step 16 31bit H...

Page 928: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 28 A 6 EC Declarations of Conformity A 6 1 FR F820 FR F840 FR F842 series ...

Page 929: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR F800 A 29 ...

Page 930: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 30 ...

Page 931: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR F800 A 31 ...

Page 932: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 32 ...

Page 933: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR F800 A 33 ...

Page 934: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 34 ...

Page 935: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR F800 A 35 ...

Page 936: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 36 ...

Page 937: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR F800 A 37 ...

Page 938: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 38 ...

Page 939: ......

Page 940: ...000 Ljubljana Phone 386 0 1 513 8116 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 AKHNATON BULGARIA 4 Andrei Ljapchev Blvd PO Box 21 BG 1756 Sofia Phone 359 0 2 817 6000 Fax 359 0 2 97 44 06 1 INEA CR CROATIA Losinjska 4 a HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 385 0 1 36 940 01 02 03 Fax 385 0 1 36 940 03 AutoCont C S S R O CZECH REPUBLIC Kafkova 1853 3 CZ 702 00 Ostrava 2 Phone 420 595 691 150 Fax 420 595 691 199 HANS FØLSGAARD A S DEN...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands